JP7358431B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

As a pachinko gaming machine typified by a gaming machine, a normal background display is displayed during the first customer waiting period after the variable symbol display ends, and during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period ends. , there is one that executes control to display a demonstration display (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2016-22196A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the demonstration display only starts when the first customer waiting period ends and the second customer waiting period begins, so there is room for improvement regarding customer waiting control. Ta.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means starts control for switching the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is switched from the normal state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table. control,
Before the display means starts control for switching the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is switched from the special state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table. Control (Fig. 18, Fig. 19, Fig. 38, Fig. 39, Fig. 40, Fig. 42, Fig. 43, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the display of the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of demonstration performance control processing. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing aspects of a first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) a second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) a third performance mode. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a decorative pattern in the 1st production mode. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following FIG. 22. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern in a 3rd performance mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the time of starting variable display in the first production mode, and (B) in the second and third production modes. It is a figure showing the flow of SP reach effect in a low base state. It is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of each part during a demo movie. It is a transition diagram of a customer waiting demonstration production. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of displaying a demo movie. (A) is a diagram showing a display example of the first scene (company name), (B) is a fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 2). It is a figure which compares the display mode of the 1st scene (company name), the 4th scene (warning 1, 2), the number of pending memories, and small symbols. It is a figure showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the game state. (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). (A1) to (A8) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing main parts of FIG. 37. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing operational examples of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a high base state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is cold-started. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is cold started. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a low base state. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is activated with a hot start in a low base state. It is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is activated with a hot start in a high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when displaying a demo movie ends over time in a low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie over time in a high base state. (A) to (E) are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends with a winning start in a low base state. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. It is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first winning prize in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting winning in the low base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize winning in the high base state. It is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize in the high base state. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demonstration movie display is ended by operating the handle in the low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a handle operation. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in the low base state. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a menu operation. 7 is a timing chart showing a flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with a menu operation. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the example of an operation when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a priority layer. It is a figure which shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration production started in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration production started in a high base state. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a figure which shows an example of the parent table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the child table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the grandchild table which comprises a lamp data table. It is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-gaming (only white button blinking and red button blinking are used during gaming). Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal parent table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal child table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: Background is a diagram showing the settings of a normal grandchild table. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table for background time saving. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the background time saving child table. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background time saving. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a child table of background probability variation. Ramp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background probability variation. Ramp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of background probability variation. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the customer waiting demonstration. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of a parent table for button white lighting. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white lighting. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table for flashing white buttons. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table for button white blinking. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of button white blinking. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the flashing red button. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the blinking red button. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the button blinking red. Lamp data table: is a diagram showing the settings of a parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: is a diagram showing the settings of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: It is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: This is a diagram showing the settings of the error parent table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the error child table. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of an error grandchild table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a common table. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation in the first scene, (B) is the third scene, and (C) is the fourth scene. It is a comparison table showing character animation display. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a list of display timings for displaying a demo movie. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (FIGS. 18 and 19). , Figure 38, Figure 39, Figure 40, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything all at once. , the user can be made aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, switching from the normal state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means,
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the special state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (Fig. 18, Fig. 19, Fig. 38, Fig. 39, Fig. 40, Fig. 42, Fig. 43, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the display of the demonstration display is started, it is possible to draw attention to changes rather than starting everything all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the luminance data table for demonstration display has a color different from the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for normal state background display and the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for special state background display. (Figure 80, Figure 84, Figure 88, Figure 92, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display. Since the color of the initial brightness data is different, the color of the light emitting means stands out when the demonstration display starts in each state, making it easy to understand that the demonstration display has started, and as a result, it is possible to improve customer waiting. can be controlled.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In the first period and the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using one brightness data table different from the background display brightness data table and the demonstration display brightness data table (FIG. 29, 38, Figure 39, Figure 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted, so By adopting this mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are activated using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control,
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
a brightness data table different from the normal state background display brightness data table, the special state background display brightness data table, and the demonstration display brightness data table in a first period after the game in the normal state ends; controlling the third light emitting means using
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the third light emitting means using the one brightness data table,
controlling the third light emitting means using the one brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIG. 29, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, Figure 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted. By keeping the mode constant in both the normal state and the special state, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in both the normal state and the special state, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a light emitting means provided corresponding to the production operation means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the first scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a first scene brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a second scene brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the first scene in the second period, controlling the third light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the first scene brightness data table and the second scene brightness data table,
In the second scene in the second period, the third light emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table (FIG. 29, FIG. 38, FIG. 39, FIG. 42, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the production operation means is being prompted, so By adopting this mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for promotion effects used when a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the performance operation means is executed, and the first brightness data table is a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for promotion effects used when a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect operation means is executed. There are fewer changes in brightness than the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for promotional effects (Figures 97 to 105, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first brightness data table is composed of brightness data for making the mode less emphasized than when the operation of the production operation means is prompted, so that the operation of the production operation means is prompted. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game is being held, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first brightness data table is characterized in that it is composed of brightness data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, since the first brightness data table is composed of brightness data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are prompted to operate the effect operation means, and as a result, This allows suitable customer waiting control to be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided in the game frame (see FIG. 36, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting means corresponding to the production operation means is provided in the game frame, but it is not managed using the same brightness data table as other light emitting means provided in the game frame, but is managed separately. Therefore, it is possible to suitably design a game machine to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the performance operation means is being prompted, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of Form 5-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1, Form 4-1, and Form 5-1,
The display means displays a display indicating that startup is in progress after the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is being activated;
The third light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is being activated (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by emitting light using the brightness data table before the background display, it is possible to confirm whether the light emitting means is normal at the startup stage, and after that, seamless The light emitting mode can be changed to a state where the light is emitted while waiting for a customer, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the attention display scene in the second period using a brightness data table for attention display scenes corresponding to the attention display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, a brightness data table that is different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene, the brightness data table for the title name display, and the brightness data table for the alert display scene is used. controlling the light emitting means using
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (see FIG. 29, etc.)
It is characterized by

Note that the company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacture, and sale of the gaming machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, by emitting a dedicated light for each, it can be used to distinguish it from other text displays. This can be emphasized through comparison, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a brightness data table different from the first brightness data table is used (Figure 29, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a common brightness data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing the capacity, and as a result, a suitable luminance data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene. Customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
Execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 seconds)>Execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene The execution period is such that the execution period (30 sec) is greater than the execution period (5 sec) of the alert display scene,
The character display of the company name and the warning text are characterized in that they may be displayed at times other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only during the demonstration display, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, thereby providing suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table different from the brightness data table for the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means using the first brightness data table in the second model introduction scene in the second period;
The brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to an animation of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine,
The first luminance data table is luminance data that is linked to the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and the animation of the character display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figure 29, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figures 91 to 98, Figure 119)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but in particular, we want to convey information about the company name, so by using brightness data that is linked to the display animation, it is emphasized when compared with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which characters introducing the gaming machine are displayed in an animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table different from the title name display brightness data table. ,
The title name display scene brightness data table includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine,
The first luminance data table is luminance data that is linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, and the luminance data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene. (Figure 29, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figures 91 to 98, Figure 119)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to convey information about the model name in particular, by using brightness data that is linked to the display animation, it is emphasized when compared with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the title name display scene in the second period using a title name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means in the attention display scene in the second period using a brightness data table for attention display scenes corresponding to the attention display scene;
A mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is a mode that is emphasized more than a mode of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. and
An aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for title name display scenes is a mode that is emphasized more than an aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for alerting display scenes. (Figure 28 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can do so by emitting dedicated light for each piece of information. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. I can do it.

The gaming machine of Form 9-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 9-1,
A mode in which the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is emphasized more than the aspect of the light emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. , and an aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for title name display scenes is more emphasized than an aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for alerting display scenes. The mode is one of the following: (1) mode with many flashes (2) mode with many lighting colors (3) mode with a large number of light emitting means used (Figure 28 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of Form 9-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 9-1,
The aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for company name display scenes is more emphasized than the aspect of the light emitting means that is controlled using the brightness data table for title name display scenes. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the company name can be emphasized more, it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is associated with, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene,
controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means in the model introduction scene in the second period using a model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the model introduction display scene;
The plurality of brightness data constituting the company name display scene brightness data table are brightness data configured such that the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light,
The plurality of brightness data constituting the model introduction scene brightness data table are brightness data configured such that the first light emitting means emits light and the second light emitting means does not emit light (FIG. 29, FIGS. 90 to 90). Figure 98)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by character display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light, and in the model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emit light. By setting the light emitting means to emit light but not emitting light from the second light emitting means, the company name display scene can be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the company name display scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using a company name display scene brightness data table corresponding to the company name display scene,
controlling the first light emitting means in the first model introduction scene in the second period using a first model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the first model introduction display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, controlling the first light emitting means using a second model introduction display scene brightness data table corresponding to the second model introduction display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period, one brightness data table is used to control the second light emitting means.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light in a dedicated light emission mode, and the first model introduction In the scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, but the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode, so that the company name is relatively The displayed scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table,
When a specific effect is executed, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table,
The rainbow brightness data table used in the second period and the rainbow brightness data table used when the specific effect is executed are a common brightness data table (FIG. 28, FIG. 31, FIG. 32, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By using the same brightness data table that is used in response to the specific performance, the capacity does not need to be increased, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the normal state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow brightness data table when a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed;
A rainbow brightness data table used for a second period after the first period after the game ends in the normal state and a second period after the first period after the game ends in the special state. The rainbow brightness data table used and the rainbow brightness data table used when the specific effect executable in the normal state and the special effect executable in the special state are executed are a common brightness data table ( Figure 28, Figure 31, Figure 32, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed in the normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used for the possible specific effects and the special effects that can be executed in the special state, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 12-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 12-1,
The specific performance and the special performance are characterized in that they are performances that definitively notify that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state.
According to this feature, since the brightness data table used for the performance that is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
The title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part that displays a text display of the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that displays a text display of the subtitle name of the gaming machine,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a subtitle name display part brightness data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part at a timing when the main title name display part switches to the subtitle name display part,
The brightness data table for the subtitle name display part is a brightness data table for causing the light emitting means to emit light in a light emitting manner linked to the animation of the character display of the subtitle name using a plurality of brightness data (see FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in this order, and by displaying the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine is completed. By emitting light, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The title name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which a character display warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed as an animation,
The animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is in a mode that is more emphasized than the animated display of the text display to alert people when playing the gaming machine,
The animation of the character display of the title name of the game machine is more emphasized than the animation of the character display to alert people when playing the game machine (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we can emphasize it by displaying each with a dedicated display animation. Among them, by emphasizing the display animation of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved. It can be carried out.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a title name display scene and an attention-calling display scene,
The title name display scene is a scene in which characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to call attention when playing the gaming machine,
The display means is
In the title name display scene, the characters of the title name of the gaming machine are displayed in an animation at a specified display position;
After that, the character display of the title name of the game machine is displayed as an animation,
In the warning display scene, a character display warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a prescribed display position;
Thereafter, a text display warning when playing the game machine is displayed without animation (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the title name of the game is displayed with a lingering movement to draw attention to the title, and to call attention, the characters are clearly displayed by avoiding the lingering movement. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes an attention-calling display scene,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to warn people when playing the gaming machine,
The alert display scene includes a first alert display part that displays a text alert for the first event, and a second alert display part that displays a text alert for the second event. ,
The background color of the character display in the first attention display part is different from the background color of the character display in the second attention display part (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using different background colors to call attention to different events, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
The company name display scene is a scene in which characters of the company name related to the gaming machine are displayed,
The warning display scene is a scene in which characters are displayed to warn people when playing the gaming machine,
The background color of the text display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the text display in the alert display scene (FIG. 33, FIG. 34, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using different background colors for displaying the company name and calling attention to it, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying the background display again;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table (FIGS. 50 and 51). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a stepwise design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying the normal state background display again;
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the special state background display again;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the normal state background display brightness data table to control the light emitting means,
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the special state background display brightness data table (Fig. 50 to Figure 52, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a stepwise design in which the control of the light emitting means is switched first and then the background display is started, it is possible to prevent the end of the demonstration display from leaving a bad aftertaste. Furthermore, the state of the lamp can be quickly notified to the player by the light emission mode of the lamp, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, The light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting conditions are satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed. It can be carried out.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the variable display in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the display means may switch the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state. before controlling the light emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of performance identification information in the normal state;
If the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the display means may switch the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of performance identification information in the special state. Before that, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of performance identification information in the special state (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first in the normal state and special state, it is possible to quickly notify that the starting conditions are satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means. This allows suitable customer waiting control to be performed.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using the background display brightness data table,
In a second period after the first period after the first special identification information ends, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the second special identification information ends;
If the first starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of production identification information corresponding to the first special identification information. Before switching, controlling the light emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to variable display of production identification information corresponding to the first special identification information,
If the second starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means changes the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information. Before switching, the light emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the production identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (FIGS. 53 to 58). etc)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter which starting condition is met, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly confirm that the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display has ended by switching the light emitting means. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the production identification information before the transmittance of the production identification information reaches the second value. (Figure 25, Figure 54, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the production identification information becomes high, it is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the variable display in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
In the normal state, if the starting condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed, the performance identification in the normal state from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of information,
In the special state, if the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance identification in the special state is started from the demonstration display before the transmittance of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of information (Figure 25, Figure 54, Figure 124, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in both the normal state and the special state, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, the starting condition is satisfied and the demonstration display ends. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
When the starting condition is met, displaying a variable display of the performance identification information such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
If the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is displayed, the performance corresponding to the first special identification information is changed from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to a variable display of identification information,
If the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the performance corresponding to the second special identification information is started from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value. Switch the display to variable display of identification information (Figure 25, Figure 54, Figure 124, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter which starting condition is met, if the switching from the demonstration display is completed before the transparency of the production identification information becomes high, the starting condition is met and the demonstration display is started. It is possible to notify that the process has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information upon satisfaction of a starting condition,
a firing operation means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display,
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
If the firing operation means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to the background display;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the demonstration display brightness data is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display. Switching from the table to the background display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means (FIG. 59, FIG. 60, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing operation means by switching the light emitting means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Menu operation means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
If the menu operating means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to a menu display;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table,
In the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display,
When the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display,
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the demonstration display brightness data is displayed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the table to the menu display brightness data table and controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light emitting means first, it is possible to quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the menu operation means being operated by switching the light emitting means, and as a result, it is possible to notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operating means. Customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Menu operation means,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
If the menu operating means is operated while displaying the demonstration display, switching from the demonstration display to a menu display;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
When the menu is displayed, controlling the light emitting means using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display,
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, the demonstration display may be performed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. controlling the light emitting means by switching from the display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table;
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the demonstration display is executed before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display. Switching from the display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by first switching the control of the light emitting means, it is possible to immediately notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means by switching the light emitting means. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
After the second period ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the background display;
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time can be prevented by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of sudden switching, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting the switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the normal state background display;
After the second period in the special state ends, displaying the switching display, and then displaying the special state background display,
If an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying the demonstration display in the normal state, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

If the interruption condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed in the special state, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (FIG. 50). ~Figure 63, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state and special state, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented by inserting a switching display to prevent it from appearing to have suddenly changed, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interrupt condition is By showing the sudden change without intervening the switching display, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
If a power failure occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display,
Then display the demonstration display and
After that, displaying the background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the background display,
If the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, displaying the background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the background display;
then displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while displaying the guide display at the display start timing of the background display (FIGS. 44 and 45)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start-up situation before a gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). Even at startup, game store staff can check the display by checking the background display, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display after turning on the power, increasing the efficiency of confirmation, and further improving the efficiency of checking. If the background display is displayed when the store is open and players are welcomed, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide clear guidance for performance adjustments from the timing of the start of play, and to provide players with guidance. A suitable gaming environment can be provided, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in the normal state;
Displaying a special state background display in the special state;
In the above normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, displaying the normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display;
Then display the demonstration display and
After that, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the normal state background display,
In the above special state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, displaying the special state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding production adjustment at the display start timing of the special state background display;
then displaying the demonstration display;
Thereafter, the special state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at the display start timing of the special state background display (FIGS. 46 to 49, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the start-up status before the game store opens can be considered to be a normal state or a special state, and a guide is displayed so that you can check in the background in which state it has started up. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts displaying. , When the background display is displayed when the game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide solid guidance for performance adjustment from the timing of the start of the game, A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the players, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying a demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display ends,
displaying a special state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Thereafter, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while the guidance display is being performed (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guidance display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variation in both the normal state and the special state, thereby preventing unnecessarily prompting for production adjustment, and once the demonstration display is completed. After the game ends, there is a possibility that the players are away from their seats, so by prompting them to adjust the performance immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to have them play in a suitable gaming environment. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information ends,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guidance display regarding performance adjustment; after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying a demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information ends,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guide display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
After that, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information ends,
displaying a special state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
After that, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information ends,
displaying the special state background display without displaying the guide display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special state background display while displaying the guide display;
Thereafter, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special state background display is displayed while the guidance display is being performed (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the guidance is displayed immediately after the change of the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state, even after the change of the second special identification information ends. By not displaying this, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and once the demonstration display ends, since there is a possibility that the players are away from their seats, the background will be removed from the demonstration display. By prompting the player to adjust the performance immediately after switching to the display, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
After the variable display ends,
Displaying a background display without displaying a guidance display related to production adjustment, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the guidance display in a specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display,
Thereafter, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not displaying the guidance display immediately after the end of the variation, it is possible to prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustment, and once the demonstration display has ended, the background display changes from the demonstration display to the background display. By prompting the production adjustment immediately after the change, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment.Furthermore, when displaying the guidance display immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, the guidance is provided after the change ends. By displaying the guidance using the same animation as when it is displayed, it is possible to emphasize that the guidance display has been displayed without incurring any cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the variable display ends and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and a second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, displaying the demonstration display;
In the special state, when the power is turned off and the second specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, displaying the demonstration display;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the change ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and the Since the game store clerk, not the player, is present, by setting the length to be short, the game store clerk can check the demonstration display immediately, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the variable display ends and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and a cold start (initial Since turning on the power (with power on) is the first step that must be performed when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, it is possible for the gaming staff to display the demonstration display. This can be quickly confirmed and the customer can learn more about the installed machine, resulting in better customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and a first specific period has elapsed after the power is turned on, a demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, after the power is turned off and the first specific period has elapsed, displaying the demonstration display;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced into a gaming parlor, so the demonstration display will be displayed immediately. By doing so, game store clerks can quickly check the demonstration display and learn more about the introduced machines, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
In the normal state, after the variable display ends, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, when a predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again. death,
In the special state, after the variable display ends, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period elapses, and after the demonstration display ends, when the predetermined period elapses, the demonstration display is displayed again. show the display,
In the normal state, after the power is turned off and the power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is finished, the predetermined period of time is displayed. has passed, display the demonstration display again,
In the special state, after the power is cut off and the power is turned on with initialization, the second specific period elapses, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display ends, the predetermined When the period has passed, the demonstration display will be displayed again,
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45, FIG. 123, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation ends, the player may not have been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so a longer time is set and a cold start (initial Since turning on the power (with power on) is the first step that must be performed when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming parlor, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, it is possible for the gaming staff to display the demonstration display. It is possible to quickly confirm the following information and to learn more about the installed machine.Furthermore, a demonstration can be displayed once in any situation: after the fluctuation in the normal state, after the fluctuation in the special state, or after a cold start. By setting the period from when is displayed until the demonstration display is displayed again to be the same, the demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 67, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurs during the game is carried over and executed both during the background display and the demonstration display, thereby stably notifying the specific error. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. (Figures 65 to 68, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurs during the game in both the normal state and the special state is carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to stably notify specific errors, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying first special identification information when a first starting condition is satisfied, and variably displaying second special identification information when a second starting condition is satisfied,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the background display in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information;
Displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In a first period after the end of variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the background display brightness data table;
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, display a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. controlling the light emitting means using
In a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is control,
If the specific error occurs during variable display of the first special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the first special identification information, if the specific error has not been resolved, the Continue controlling the light emitting means,
If the specific error occurs during variable display of the second special identification information, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, if the specific error is not resolved, the brightness data table for the specific error is used. Continue controlling the light emitting means (Figures 65 to 68, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information is carried over and executed both during the background display and during the demonstration display. By doing so, stable specific error notification can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The brightness data constituting the demonstration display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110 to 110). 112 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for demonstration display to have different main colors in the luminance data, specific errors can be detected depending on the light emission mode during demonstration display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The brightness data constituting the background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110 to 110). 112 etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, specific errors can be detected depending on the light emission mode during background display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
The brightness data constituting the normal state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors that occupy a large proportion,
The brightness data constituting the special state background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different colors (FIGS. 35, 78 to 89, and 110). ~Figure 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors in the luminance data, and the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display are configured to have different main colors. By configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different from the brightness data table for the special state background display, it is possible to prevent specific errors from occurring depending on the light emission mode during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs in the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data;
The brightness data for demonstration display and the brightness data for specific error have different colors that account for a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for demonstration display to have different main colors in the luminance data, a specific error may occur depending on the light emission mode during demonstration display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display brightness data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display brightness data;
The brightness data for background display and the brightness data for specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, specific errors may occur depending on the light emission mode during background display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state has ended, if no specific error has occurred, the first light emitting means and the first 2. Controlling the light emitting means,
In a first period after the game in the special state has ended, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
If the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display brightness data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display brightness data;
The brightness data for the normal state background display and the brightness data for the specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion,
The brightness data for the special state background display and the brightness data for the specific error have different colors that occupy a large proportion (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the main color of the brightness data is made different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a normal state background display, and the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a special state background display are made different. By configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different from the brightness data of As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is configured to be different between the brightness data forming the demonstration display brightness data table and the brightness data forming the specific error brightness data table (Fig. 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for demonstration display to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, the light emitting mode during demonstration display can be changed. It can be suggested that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
The luminance data forming the background display luminance data table and the luminance data forming the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (Fig. 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for background display to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, the light emitting mode during background display can be changed. It can be suggested that a specific error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display. ,
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error does not occur, the light emission is performed using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display. control the means;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error does not occur, controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the normal state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
When the specific error occurs during the game in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, if the specific error is not resolved, control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table. continue,
The luminance data configuring the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data configuring the specific error luminance data table are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different;
The light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is configured to be different between the brightness data forming the special state background display brightness data table and the brightness data forming the specific error brightness data table. (Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display are configured to differ in the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player, and the luminance data table for specific errors By configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different depending on the brightness data table for the special state background display and the brightness data table for the special state background display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the background display regardless of which background is being displayed. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the second period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs in the second period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data;
The demonstration display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different ( Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the demonstration display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if no specific error has occurred, controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means using background display brightness data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs in the first period,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the background display brightness data;
The background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different ( Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a background display, a specific error can be detected depending on the light emitting mode during the background display. It can be suggested that this is occurring, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state has ended, if no specific error has occurred, the first light emitting means and the first 2. Controlling the light emitting means,
In a first period after the game in the special state has ended, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light emitting means and the controlling the second light emitting means;
If the specific error occurs in the first period after the game in the normal state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the normal state background display brightness data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light emitting means using specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the special state background display brightness data;
The normal state background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different. ,
The special state background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are configured such that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means that are visually recognized by the player are different. (Figure 35, Figures 78 to 89, Figures 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is made different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a normal state background display, and the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a special By configuring the movement of the light emitting means to be shown to the player to be different depending on the brightness data for the status background display, it is possible to identify the state by the light emitting mode during the background display, regardless of whether it is a normal state or a special state. It can be suggested that an error has occurred, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, gaming media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department, and gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department. In either case, switching from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout section, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is emitted corresponding to the demonstration display. By switching to the mode, the demonstration display can be made to look natural, the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, controlling the light emitting means using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error,
Thereafter, during the first period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, during the second period, if the specific error is not resolved, continue controlling the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, gaming media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department, and gaming media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the paying out department. In either case, switching from the specific error brightness data table to the background display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game medium by the detection means, Controlling the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, no matter what number of game balls are distributed to the payout section, at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is changed to emit light corresponding to the background display. By switching to this mode, the background display can be made to look natural quickly, and the processing can be standardized, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the second period, if the payout condition for game media is met and the period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is determined from the demonstration display brightness data table. controlling the light emitting means by switching to an error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detecting means detected the game medium, the specific error brightness data table Control the light emitting means by switching to the demonstration display brightness data table (FIG. 35, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the detection means does not detect a state, there is a possibility of a specific error, but there is also a possibility that the ball is delayed, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not changed immediately, and the game ball is When detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is
A game machine that can play games,
a payout unit that pays out game media;
a detection means provided in the payout section and configured to detect game media;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
If the conditions for paying out game media are met and the detection means does not detect any game media and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs;
The display means is
Displaying a background display during a first period after the game ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period ends;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display;
In the second period, if the specific error has not occurred, controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display;
During the first period, if the payout condition for game media is met and the period in which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, a specific error corresponding to the specific error is determined from the background display brightness data table. controlling the light emitting means by switching to an error brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detecting means detected the game medium, the specific error brightness data table Control the light emitting means by switching to the background display brightness data table (FIG. 35, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the detection means does not detect a state, there is a possibility of a specific error, but there is also a possibility that the ball is delayed, so the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not changed immediately, and the game ball is When detected, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

Next, a mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings. In the following, the front side of Fig. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear, back) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side are This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," "Normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach," "Super reach" may be "SP reach," etc. It is sometimes abbreviated as.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decoration are displayed. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols corresponding to the symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. The notification image 004SG201 (see Fig. 21), the remaining time saving display 004SG202 (see Fig. 21), which shows the remaining number of time saving, etc., are displayed in front (upper layer) of the effect image such as the character, so that the effect image While this prevents the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error displays from being reduced due to duplication, decorative symbols are stored on the back side (lower layer) of the production image. By displaying the decorative patterns, it may be possible to prevent the decorative patterns from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the effect image.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

In addition, a fourth symbol display provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, is provided. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in FIG. 1, positions above and below the image display device 5), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. ing. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 36). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The payout control board 004SG030 includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on the reception of the payout signal. The device 004SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 004SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device 004SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 004SG031 depending on the form of the game ball detection signal.

Further, the payout control board 004SG030 includes a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is holding the ball batting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the firing device 004SG033 that can fire game balls onto the game board 2. In addition, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 004SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been fired by the firing device 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Furthermore, since the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers, the images of each of these layers are drawn and displayed in the VRAM area. a layered image drawing area for placement; a display image creation area for further superimposing (synthesizing) the images drawn and placed in each layered image drawing area to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5; is located. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

The VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images, and a layer for drawing and arranging layer 3 images. Three image drawing areas are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low). In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

The layer 1 image drawing area includes a special figure holding memory display area 5U that specifiably displays the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number at the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5. At the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5, there is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the interface image and a second interface image that includes a small pattern whose display screen is smaller than the decorative pattern and a display of the number of reserved memories. be.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background display is drawn in order to display the background display in the entire area of the display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (the first interface image and the second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority. The image (decoration pattern) displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so it is displayed as a middle layer in the image display device 5. The image (background display) that is displayed as an image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have a transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to the process of initializing the data when the power is turned on, without restoring the data that existed before the power was turned on, and then putting the gaming machine in a state where it can execute various processes. . Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (that the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that hot start refers to putting the gaming machine into a state where various processes can be executed based on backed up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also referred to as power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is set as a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which both time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state). Note that the variable probability state with time saving may be simply referred to as the "variable probability state". The command 96XXH is an error designation command that designates that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and that the error has been canceled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution. Command E100H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies execution of a customer waiting demonstration (demonstration performance). Command F100H is a frame state display designation command that designates the state of each input port (including on/off of touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You can also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure display result than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). is assigned to. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' that transition to a low-probable, high-base state with only time-saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable strange jackpot A", "probable strange jackpot The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: super reach (no pseudo series), super reach (one pseudo series), and super reach (two pseudo series). The present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach variation pattern in this embodiment includes a variation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-2) in which the variable display result is a jackpot. Variable display results as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (1 pseudo-run), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the result is a loss (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach (2 pseudo-runs) There are a variation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is changed to PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -1 (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 35%. , PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A to C, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) using the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table B. ), PB1-2 (Super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach (pseudo continuous effect 2) (times) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 are determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 are determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 70%. .

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is one or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure. Using the variation pattern determination table A, change the variation pattern to PA1-1 (variation pattern with no shortening, non-reach error), PA2-1 (normal reach error), and PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)), and PA2-4 (variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a loss, and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-3 (variation pattern with shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-continuous effect) miss variation pattern), It is determined from PA2-3 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (one pseudo continuous performance)) and PA2-4 (a variation pattern that misses the super reach (two pseudo continuous performances)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, if the gaming state is a high base state (time saving state or variable probability state), select the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss to change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-3 (shortened PA2-1 (non-reach deviation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (1 pseudo continuous effect) deviation pattern) pattern) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach (pseudo continuous performance twice)). More specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , PA2-3 are determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern is determined according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of The selection ratio of any of the variable patterns for jackpots (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied, for example, depending on the gaming state, regardless of the type of jackpot. By doing so, the variable display is performed in a variable pattern suitable for the gaming state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area 004SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 004SG153, a game control counter setting section 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 004SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 004SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the above are held as pending data. The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 004SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 004SG151B can be used to execute a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 004SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 004SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 004SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 004SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 004SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 004SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 004SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has, for example, a performance control data holding area 004SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 004SG190 shown in FIG. 10(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 004SG191, a performance control timer setting section 004SG192, a performance control counter setting section 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 004SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 004SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 004SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 004SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 004SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A as shown in FIG. 10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 004SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 004SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 004SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 004SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the starting winning command reception command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (004SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (004SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 004SGS102 (004SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (004SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (004SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 004SGS105 (004SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 004SGS103 and 004SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 004SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (004SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, transmission settings of a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (004SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 sends information to the effect control board 12 by, for example, storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command (004SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 004SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 13 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol pending storage number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 004 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 004SGS144), the process moves to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 004SGS145). . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 004SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145;N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 004 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 004SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "0" (step 004SGS148), the process moves to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 5 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or "miss". and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004 SGS150). In addition, in this step 004SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state in this feature), if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be a "jackpot". ”, and if it is not applicable, it is determined as “miss”.

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 004SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when the variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 004 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 004 SGS 154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-certain, high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 004SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3". Note that after the processing in step 004SGS155, the process advances to step 004SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 004SGS150; N), the process in step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) in response to the predetermined result of the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot gaming state is set. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 004SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) for updating to another background display and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first production mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second production mode, and the third background display corresponding to the third production mode One of the background displays 004SG083 is selected and displayed. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the gaming state is the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the gaming state is the normal state. It can be displayed when the state is in the high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and also a process of displaying a speaker on the speaker in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is being displayed. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start wait timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 17, the production control CPU 120 first starts the pending storage display (first pending display 004SG101 and second pending display 004SG102) in the special figure pending storage display area 5U of the image display device 5. A pending display update process is executed to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the display according to the storage contents of the winning command reception command buffer 004SG194A (step S161). After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, a determination is made to execute a pre-read preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display color of the pending display, etc.). A prefetch notice setting process in which determination, setting, etc. are performed may be executed together with the pending display update process.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Demonstration production control processing)
Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. 18 to 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of FIG. 16. In the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the demonstration movie display is being executed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not the demo movie display is being executed is determined by whether or not a demo movie execution flag indicating that the demo movie display is being executed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is not being executed, it is determined whether the menu is being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is being displayed is determined by whether or not a menu displaying flag indicating that the menu is being displayed is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether a touch ring on flag indicating that touch ring 004SG035 is on is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the demo movie is waiting to start (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the demo movie is waiting to start is determined by whether or not a demo movie start waiting flag indicating waiting to start the demo movie is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting to start, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag indicating reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004 SGS505 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received, the timer value corresponds to approximately 120 seconds as the value of the demo movie start waiting timer for measuring the time until the demonstration movie display starts. (60000) (Step 004SGS506), set the demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), and set the value of the guidance display start wait timer to measure the time until the guidance display starts, which corresponds to about 30 seconds. A timer value (15000) is set (step 004SGS512), a guidance display start wait flag indicating a wait for guidance display start is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether a power-on designation command reception flag indicating reception of a power-on designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on designation command has been received, a timer value (30000) corresponding to approximately 60 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS508), and the demo movie start wait timer value is set. Set a flag (step 004SGS511), set a timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), set the guidance display start wait flag (step 004SGS513), and start the demonstration. The performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on designation command has not been received, it is determined whether a power failure recovery designation command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not the power failure recovery designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power failure recovery designation command reception flag indicating reception of the power failure recovery designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power failure recovery designation command has not been received, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power failure recovery designation command has been received, a timer value (45000) corresponding to approximately 90 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS510), and the demo movie A start wait flag is set (Step 004SGS511), a timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds is set as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and a guidance display start wait flag is set (Step 004SGS513). , the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is waiting to start, it is determined whether the end condition E2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied is determined by whether or not a starting opening winning designation command reception flag indicating reception of the starting opening winning designation command is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the end condition E2 is satisfied, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), The guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the termination condition E2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether or not the end condition E3 is satisfied is determined based on whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display designation command changes from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the demo movie start wait timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration production control process ends. Then, the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether or not the end condition E4 is satisfied is determined based on whether or not menu display control was started in the previous menu display process of step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is satisfied, the menu displaying flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the demo movie start wait timer is set. The value is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), and the demonstration production control process ends. Then, the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the end condition E4 is not satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether the timer is waiting for the start of the guidance display (step 004SGS524). ). Whether or not the system is waiting to start the guidance display is determined by whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display start wait time is determined, the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and whether or not the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0 or not, that is, the guidance display It is determined whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the time measurement by the start waiting timer started (step 004SGS526).

If it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0, the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), and the demonstration production control process is started. It ends and returns to the production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that there is no waiting for the guidance display to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is not 0, it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0 or not. It is determined whether a specified time (any one of 60 seconds, 90 seconds, and 120 seconds) has elapsed since the start of time measurement by the demo movie start waiting timer (Step 004SGS529).

If it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie execution flag is set (step 004SGS531), A timer value (27500) corresponding to approximately 55 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie timer for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), and the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533). The demonstration performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is being executed, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, that is, the occurrence of a starting prize, the turning on of touch ring 004SG035, or the start of menu display. is identified (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie timer is subtracted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is checked to see if it is 0 or not. It is determined whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of time measurement by the demo movie timer (Step 004SGS536).

If it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS538), and the demo movie A timer value (15000) corresponding to approximately 30 seconds is set as the timer value of the start waiting timer (step 004SGS539), a guidance display is started (step 004SGS540), the demonstration production control process is ended, and the process returns to the production control main process. do.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), and the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542). , the demo movie display is ended (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, that is, whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the termination condition E4 is not satisfied, that is, if the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demonstration production control process is ended and the process returns to the production control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the end condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that the end condition E4 is satisfied, the menu displaying flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, whether or not a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS546).

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, if the menu display ends due to the start winning, the menu displaying flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demonstration production control process is ended, and production control is performed. Return to main processing.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the menu display has ended (step 004SGS548). Whether or not the menu display has ended is determined based on whether or not the menu display control has ended in the previous menu display process of step S80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demonstration effect control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu displaying flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to approximately 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets a demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) equivalent to about 30 seconds as the value of the guide display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and waits for the guide display to start. A flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether end condition 2 is satisfied, that is, whether a starting prize has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that the end condition 2 is satisfied, the demonstration performance control process is ended and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether termination condition 4 is satisfied, that is, whether menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not satisfied, it is determined whether touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 changes from on to off in response to the frame state display designation command.

If it is determined that the touch ring 004SG035 is off at step 004SGS552, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), and a timer value (60000) corresponding to approximately 120 seconds is set as the value of the demo movie start wait timer. (Step 004SGS506), sets the demo movie start wait flag (Step 004SGS511), sets a timer value (15000) corresponding to about 30 seconds as the value of the guidance display start wait timer (Step 004SGS512), and starts the guidance display. A wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demonstration performance control process is ended, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is satisfied, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), and the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is set. Clear it to 0 (step 004SGS520), clear the guide display start wait flag (step 004SGS521), clear the timer value of the guide display start wait timer to 0 (step 004SGS522), and end the demonstration production control process. Return to production control main processing.

(Type of production mode)
Next, the types of production modes will be explained based on FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing (A1) and (A2) the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) the second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols (for the low base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are circular figures when viewed from the front. A numeric display section 004SG051 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the pedestal section and the front of the numeric pedestal section, and 10 types corresponding to each number "0" to "9" of the numeric display section 004SG051. character display section 004SG052 on which characters (all characters are omitted) are displayed, an information pedestal section having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and information regarding the characters displayed on the front of the information pedestal section (for example, in this embodiment). In the form of , an information display section 004SG053 consisting of the character's name), a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 004SG054 displayed so as to surround these number display section 004SG051, character display section 004SG052, and information display section 004SG053; It consists of

In this embodiment, the name of the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052 is displayed on the information display section 004SG053, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the information is related to the character displayed in section 004SG052, various information other than the name (for example, information such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, and items owned by the character) may be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21(B1) and (C1), when the gaming state is the high base state, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are as follows: It is composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of numbers "0" to "9" and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section 004SG064 displayed so as to surround the number display section 004SG061. The decorative pattern for the high base state is not provided with a character display section and an information display section like the decorative pattern for the low base state.

Further, in a display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

As shown in FIG. 21, the performance control CPU 120 has a first performance mode (see FIGS. 21(A1) and (A2)), a second performance mode (see FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2)), and a second performance mode (see FIGS. 21(B1) and (B2)) as performance modes. It is possible to execute any of three performance modes (see FIGS. 21 (C1) and (C2)). The first production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability low base state. Further, the second production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability high base state, and the third production mode is a production mode that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability high base state. This is an executable production mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), in the first production mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a daytime city scene is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The displayed first background display 004SG081 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R linearly from the top to the bottom. executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom edge of the image. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". " is displayed repeatedly. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and small symbols are displayed, and the special symbol provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the pending memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F, a first pending display 004SG101 and a second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are displayed. be done. In addition, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes, so their explanation will be omitted below. do.

As shown in FIG. 21 (B1), in the second production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the evening city scenery is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The displayed second background display 004SG082 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around a rotation axis pointing in the vertical direction. Ru.

For example, the decorative pattern in the second production mode has a first side and a second side that is the opposite side to the first side, and the first side has the preceding decorative pattern (for example, "3"). Decorative designs) are displayed. On the other hand, when the first side faces forward, it is not possible to specify whether a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed on the second side. In other words, since the pedestal display section 004SG064 has low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

In addition, the decorative pattern can be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view), and by rotating in the order of the first surface, second surface, first surface, second surface, etc. , the number increases in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9" it returns to "0" and the updated display from "0" to "9" is displayed. It is done repeatedly. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the rotating display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-handed hitting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations. At the lower left corner, a time saving remaining display 004SG202 indicating the remaining number of times the time saving control will be executed (in this example, characters "XX times remaining", XX=0 to 100) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21 (C1), in the third production mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a night city scene is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. The third background display 004SG083 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (C2), the variable display of decorative symbols is achieved by a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line from the top to the bottom. A variable display is executed.

For example, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame downward from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then moves downward in a straight line to the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The frame is displayed downward from the bottom edge of the image. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" decorative pattern) passes through the decorative pattern stop position set at the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, a subsequent decorative pattern (for example, a "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern cannot be seen, but the preceding "3" decorative pattern After passing the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", return to "0", and continue from "0" to "9". ” is repeatedly increased. That is, the scroll display of the decorative symbols is executed by displaying the decorative symbols "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" is displayed to notify the player of promoting right-handed hitting operations.

Further, the decorative pattern and the small pattern have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is displayed in a frame from the upper side of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is displayed in a frame from the lower side for a predetermined period. It takes a long time. That is, a predetermined period of time is required until one decorative pattern is displayed and the display of the decorative pattern is finished. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed by being switched (updated) a plurality of times (for example, five times, etc.) in the above-mentioned predetermined period.

In addition, in the scrolling display in the first presentation mode and the third presentation mode, and the rotating display in the second presentation mode, the decorative design changes the variable display speed from low to high speed at the start of the variable display, and when the variable display stops. While the variable display speed can be changed from high speed to low speed, the small symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the form in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode as the performance modes is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute four or more types of presentation modes. In particular, a plurality of types of performance modes may be executable in response to one gaming state (for example, a low-probability, low-base state).

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described based on FIGS. 22 to 25. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first production mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 22. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first effect mode and (B) the second and third effect modes.

In addition, in the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, the diagrams with lines other than solid lines (for example, one-dot chain lines, dotted lines, etc.) and arrows without symbols are not displayed on the display screen. This is not a representation of the image that was created, but is provided to explain the movement of the image.

(Example of operation of variable display in first production mode)
First, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first performance mode will be described based on FIGS. 22 and 23.

FIG. 22(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the first production mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first pending displays 004SG101 are displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U (first pending memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. At the same time, the active display 004SG103 is erased from the area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, The decorative pattern variation start action is started in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 22(D)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 22(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 22(D)).

Note that the deletion effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 22(B) continues for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), when the shift display for moving the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F is completed, it is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. When the action of the decorative symbol (reversal action of the character) is completed and the upward action is started, and when the upward movement is completed, the downward movement is started and the scroll display is displayed as shown in FIG. 22(F). will be started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(F), when the (reversal motion of the character) of the decorative symbol displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is completed, the upward action is started, and when the upward movement is completed, the As shown in 22(G), downward movement is started and scrolling display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(G), the action of the decorative symbol displayed in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C (reversal motion of the character) is completed and the ascending action is started, and when the ascending movement is completed, As shown in FIG. 22(H), downward movement is started and scroll display is started.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started and the variable display of the small symbols has started, the left decorative symbol display area 5L, The variable display of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the middle decorative symbol display area starts in this order, but the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is displayed as active. The scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is not started until the shift display for moving to the area 5F is completed.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort. In addition, from the start of the shift display with the start of the variable display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols are not scrolled, a variable start action in which the character moves in reverse is performed, so the variable display is started. It is possible to make the player aware that the Note that the operation mode of the fluctuation start action can be changed in various ways.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. The transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion, and as the speed increases, fade-out display is performed where the transmittance reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L are displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of variable display, as shown in FIGS. The speed becomes high as shown in (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 22(G) to 23(K), the decorative symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R and the ornamental symbols in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the start of the variable display, A fade-out display is executed in which the speed increases and the transmittance also increases as the speed increases.

(Example of operation of variable display in 3rd production mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third performance mode will be described based on FIG. 24.

FIG. 24(A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols scrolled and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been completed, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are still being variably displayed. In addition, active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and two first pending displays 004SG101 are displayed in the special figure pending memory display area 5U (first pending memory number "2"). Further, the small symbols and the right-hit notification image 004SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) than the decorative symbols. (See Figure 24(A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the small symbols are stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the finished variable display becomes active display. At the same time, the active display 004SG103 is erased from the area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbol starts; Since it is in the base state, the decorative pattern variation start action (see FIG. 24(A)) is not performed. Furthermore, a shift display in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F is started.

Specifically, the first pending display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left as if drawing a parabola, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area. By moving to 5F, it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 24(C)). In addition, the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left moves horizontally toward the left ( shift display) (see FIG. 24(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 24(D)).

Note that the erasure effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 24(B) continues for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, Scroll display of the decorative pattern displayed on 5R is started (see FIG. 24(D)). In the high base state, scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R However, until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F is completed, the decorative symbol display area 5L, Scroll display of the decorative symbols displayed on 5C and 5R does not start.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the movement of the first pending display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F is completed (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, so the variable display based on the pending display is The player can be made to recognize that the game has started without any discomfort.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of low speed, medium speed, and high speed, and the display speed increases as well. Proportionally, the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases, and as the speed increases, fade-out display is executed where the transmittance reaches approximately 90%. For example, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display starts, as shown in FIGS. , the speed becomes high as shown in FIG. 24(H). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the transmittance of the decorative pattern is set to the first value (0%) when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and when the variable display starts, the transmittance gradually increases and reaches the final value. Although the second value (90%) is exemplified in the high-speed scroll display, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value may be the minimum value of the transmittance, as long as the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, when the transmittance is 5%, the decorative pattern is In the case where it is most clearly displayed, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. Further, the second value may be the maximum value of the transmittance and should be a value that makes the decorative pattern almost difficult to see. For example, when the transmittance is 100%, the decorative pattern is almost visible. If there is no such condition, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. That is, the first value and the second value can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs the action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols in the special symbol pending storage display area 5U. The scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started until the shift display for switching the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type of fluctuation pattern designation command ( For example, when a variable display is executed based on a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command), By being able to perform a common shift display, even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the common shift display is performed, so the number of shift display patterns can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols while performing a pending shift display with the start of variable display, and also displays a special symbol pending memory display. Until the first pending display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in area 5U, is switched and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F, the scrolling display of decorative symbols is not started, while in the high base state , the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the decorative pattern fluctuation start action is not performed while performing the pending shift display with the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, In the high base state, the production control CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative symbols when performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and also performs The scroll display of the decorative symbols may not be started until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the display area is switched and displayed as the active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display, and while the shift display is being performed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed. By performing a fluctuation start action that operates in a manner different from the above, it is possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform shift display. Furthermore, since the variation start action is performed while the shift display is being performed in the high base state, which is more advantageous than the low base state, it is possible to excite the start of the variable display of decorative symbols in the high base state.

In addition, even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and the first type When a variable display is executed based on a variation pattern specification command of the second type (for example, a non-reach variation pattern specification command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command) Since it is possible to perform a common shift display even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, a common shift display can be performed even when a variable display based on a different type of variable display pattern is executed, reducing the number of shift display patterns. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, after the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed, the decorative symbol display areas are moved in the order of left, right, and center. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed on 5L, 5C, and 5R is started, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display starts with the start of the variable display of the special pattern. After the shift display for switching the pending display corresponding to the display to the active display is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the left, right, and center decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts. If the shift display is performed, the scroll display of any of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be started.

(Operation mode of each part at the start of variable display)
As shown in FIG. 25(A), in the first production mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the fluctuation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, scrolling display starts. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the speed is gradually decelerated in the order of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the ornamental symbols in the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the ornamental symbols in the center ornamental symbol display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in this order. Further, when displaying a temporary stop, a variable stop action is performed, and a loop action is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, when the variable display ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative symbols ends and the small symbols are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B), in the second production mode and the third production mode, when the variable display based on the variable pattern PA1-3 of shortened non-reach is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is Along with the start, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be rotated or scrolled all at once without performing a variation start action. Further, a shift display of a pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

In addition, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scroll display to high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) also increases in proportion to the increase in speed and fades out. It will be done. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all gradually decelerate all at once to a low-speed display, and the transmittance decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed. (Transparency) also decreases, causing the image to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Thereafter, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed all at once. That is, the variable stop action and loop action such as in the first performance mode and the second performance mode are not executed, and the variable display ends as it is, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together with the small symbols. Thereafter, the next variable display can be started after a symbol determination period (for example, 500 ms).

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first production mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the rotating display is executed in the second production mode or the scroll display is executed in the third production mode. (Fade-out display period A23<Fade-out display period A21; see FIGS. 25(A) and 25(B)).

In addition, in the first performance mode, the mode shown in FIG. 25(A) will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In addition, in the second performance mode and the third performance mode, the mode shown in FIG. 25(B) will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

(Example of operation of SP reach effect)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach effect will be described based on FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a low base state. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of SP reach effect in a high base state. In addition, in FIG. 27, an example of the operation of the reach effect in the third effect mode will be explained, but it may be possible to perform the same reach effect in the second effect mode, or it may be possible to perform a different reach effect. .

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 causes multiple characters to appear in stages based on the variable display result. Displays whether or not to execute a step-up effect, and a specific step-up effect display pattern (see FIG. 26(B)) in which the background display becomes a rainbow mode to notify that a jackpot is confirmed at a predetermined step in the step-up effect. Determine whether or not to do so. Then, when it is decided to execute the step-up effect and display the specific step-up effect display pattern, the step-up effect is started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up effect is started at the predetermined step. The display pattern is displayed (see FIG. 26(B)). In addition, if it is decided not to execute the step-up effect, or if it is decided to execute the step-up effect but the display of a specific step-up effect display pattern is not determined, the step whose background does not include a rainbow display A close-up effect display pattern is displayed.

Next, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode, and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 26(C)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the notification to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. An SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a performance (see FIG. 26(D)). In the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect (Fig. 26 (E) (F )reference). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Next, from the time when the battle is settled until the predetermined operational validity period has elapsed, an operation promotion display 004SG071 consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a button display imitating the push button 31B are displayed. 004SG072 is displayed (see FIG. 26(G)).

Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed, the operation promotion display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 are hidden and the process ends. . If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect display 004SG073 that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed. At the same time, a predetermined production sound effect is output to notify that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 26(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character is displayed, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background display. , After the jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 26(I)), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first Background display 004SG081 is displayed, and when the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, a jackpot confirmed symbol combination (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, The jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is negative, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the production position, and the result notification display 004SG078 indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed. (See FIG. 26(K)), in the notification performance, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232 ") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 26(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(M), with the end of the notification effect (SP reach effect), the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 When is displayed, the combination of confirmed symbols that are out of place (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the small symbols and each decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the out-of-order display results are derived and displayed (Fig. 26 ( (See M).

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(A), when the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern is started in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls whether the specific character appears and It is determined whether or not to display a specific cut-in effect display pattern (see FIG. 27(D)) in which the background display is in a rainbow mode to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed, and the determination result is stored.

Then, after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. Then, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 27(B)). At this time, decorative patterns are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the notification to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. An SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a performance (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, if the display of a specific cut-in effect display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, after the reach title display 004SG070 is displayed, the cut-in effect is started with the specific cut-in effect display pattern (Fig. 27 (See (D)). In addition, if it is decided not to perform a cut-in effect, or if it is decided to execute a cut-in effect but the display of a specific cut-in effect display pattern is not decided, a cut with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed. The in display is displayed.

Then, in the SP reach effect, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 which is the normal background display, and represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach effect (Figure 27 (E) (See (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image whose appearance differs depending on the type of SP reach effect.

Regarding the flow of FIGS. 27(G) to (M), the only difference is that the third background display 004SG083 for high base is used in FIGS. 27(J) to (M). Since it is almost the same as M), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up performance in which the background has a rainbow pattern in the low base state (see FIG. 26(B)), as a specific performance to notify the confirmation of a jackpot. In the base state, it is possible to execute a specific cut-in effect including a cut-in in which the background has a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 27(D)). Although the specific step-up effect and the specific cut-in effect have the same rainbow pattern as the background, the display patterns are different, but the lighting patterns of the panel lamps and side lamps are the same. In other words, since the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the board lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), the data capacity for light emission can be reduced.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance [demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demonstration effect will be explained based on FIGS. 28 to 34. In FIG. 28, (A) shows the start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and (B) shows the configuration of displaying the demo movie. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part during display of a demo movie. FIG. 30 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an operation example of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing display examples of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). FIG. 34 is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demonstration performance" is for the purpose of the performance control CPU 120 to notify that the game is in a game standby state where no games (for example, variable display, jackpot games, small win games, etc.) are being played, that is, it is in a customer waiting state. This is mainly performed by displaying a demo movie display (see FIGS. 31 and 32) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display is a display that informs the player that an empty machine is not being played by a player by displaying a demo movie display that is different from the background display during play. The company name scene that lets you know whether the game machine is related to the company, what kind of story the pachinko game machine 1 is about, what kind of characters appear, what kind of production and what kind of specifications are included. It consists of a model introduction scene that tells you whether the pachinko game machine 1 is available, a model introduction scene that shows the title and subtitle of the pachinko game machine 1, and a warning scene that tells you things to be careful about before playing the game. In the demo movie display, in addition to the content described above, for example, in a model introduction scene, an introduction of effects, an explanation of model specifications, etc. may be introduced, and the content can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIGS. 28A to 30, the "customer waiting demonstration performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is performed when the performance control CPU 120 meets any of the following starting conditions S1 to S6. It is started based on the determination that it has been established. Specifically, the start condition S1 is established when a first period of time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 upon completion of the variable display, and the start condition S2 is established when a second period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on with initialization, and the start condition S3 is satisfied. is established when the third time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command output from the main board 11 due to the power being turned on without initialization, and the start condition S4 is satisfied. is established when the fourth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, and the start condition S5 is established when the fifth time (for example, 120 seconds) has passed since the menu screen display ended. For example, 120 seconds) has elapsed, and the start condition S6 is established when the sixth time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the demo movie display via the conditions S1 to S5 has ended (2 weeks). From the second step onwards, the same condition as in S6 is established (the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance).

Further, the "demonstration movie display" ends based on the effect control CPU 120 determining that any of the following end conditions E1 to E4 is satisfied. Specifically, the end condition E1 is satisfied when the end time (for example, 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started, the end condition E2 is satisfied when a starting prize has occurred, and the end condition E3 is satisfied. is satisfied when the touch ring 004SG035 is turned on, and the termination condition E4 is satisfied when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

Furthermore, although the demo movie display is not in progress, when the first to sixth hours are being counted in the waiting state for the above start conditions to be satisfied (demo movie start waiting period), the above end conditions E2 to E4 are met. When the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are satisfied, the time measurement is stopped, and the time measurement is reset (reset) when the start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are satisfied.

In addition, during the demo movie start waiting period, the demo movie display is not displayed, but menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays regarding production adjustment. (See FIG. 37 (A4) and FIG. 123).

Note that the guidance display regarding production adjustment is, for example, a menu that allows production function adjustments such as customization and customization reset of various production functions such as the vibration function, V flash function, auto button function, and production mode provided in the push button 31B. In addition to the menu guide display 004SG401 that guides the operation of the push button 31B to display the screen, and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 that guides the button operations to adjust the volume and light intensity, there are also functions for adjusting production functions other than those mentioned above. It may also include a guidance display.

Further, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the termination condition E2 is almost never satisfied. In other words, in order for the starting prize to occur, the ball-hitting operation handle 30 must be operated, so basically, the ending condition E3 is satisfied before the ending condition E2, but in the following irregular case, There is a possibility that the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Irregular case 1: The player calls a store clerk based on the occurrence of a grape (so-called ball jammed between nails), but by the time the clerk arrives, a demo movie has started to be displayed, and after that, the grape is released. If a starting prize is generated by this, the demo movie display ends without operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, so the end condition E3 is not satisfied, but the end condition E2 is satisfied.

Irregular case 2: If the ON state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the production control CPU 120 due to some kind of malfunction in the CPU 103 or a malfunction in the production control CPU 120, the on-state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed and the prize is won. may occur, so the termination condition E2 is satisfied without the termination condition E3 being satisfied.

Note that the end condition E3, which is satisfied when the touch sensor is on, does not need to be set as the end condition. In such a case, the demo movie display will not end only by operating the steering wheel, and the end condition will be set when the start winning occurs. E2 is established and the demo movie display ends.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes, the first scene to the fourth scene. Specifically, the first scene is a "company name" part (company name part) that displays the name and slogan of the company involved in development, manufacturing, sales, etc. of the company (Figure 31 (A)). See B).

The second scene is composed of "Model Introduction 1" to "Model Introduction 3" parts (Model Introduction 1 to 3 parts) in which the story of the performance performed in the pachinko game machine is introduced. In the "model introduction 1" part (model introduction 1 part), ally characters and names appearing in the production are displayed (see FIGS. 31(C) to (F)). In the "Model Introduction 2-1" part (Model Introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see Figures 31 (G) and (H)), and "Model Introduction 2 -2" part (model introduction 2-2 part), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see Figures 31 (J) and (K)), and the "model introduction 2-3" part. In (model introduction part 2-3), a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character and narration characters are displayed (see FIGS. 32(M) to 32(O)). "Model introduction 3-1" part (Model introduction 3-1 part), "Model introduction 2-1" part (Model introduction 2-1 part) and "Model introduction 2-2" part (Model introduction 2-2 part) ), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text (see Figure 32 (I)), and in the "Model introduction 3-2" part (Model introduction 3-2 part), "Model introduction 2- 2" (model introduction 2-2 part) part and "model introduction 2-3" part (model introduction 2-3 part), the cut-in display of the ally character is displayed without text (Figure 32 ( (See L).

The third scene consists of a "model name main title name" part (main title part) and a "model subtitle name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) in which the main title name of the pachinko machine is displayed ( (See FIGS. 32(P) to (V)). In addition, in the "Model main title name" part (main title part), the main title name "FEVER POWERFUL" is displayed, and in the "Model subtitle name" part, the subtitle name "II/All set Ver." is displayed. Is displayed.

The "model main title name" is the theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in question, which expresses the theme of the machine in one word, and the "model subtitle name" is the subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in question. The information may be supplementary information added to the main title name of the model (for example, "II" indicating that this is the second work of this title, or the heading "All members set Ver."), and the content may vary. Can be changed.

The fourth scene consists of a "Caution 1" part (Caution 1 part) and a "Caution 2" part (Caution 2 part) in which the player is alerted (Figure 32 (W) - (See (X)). In addition, in the "Caution 1" part (Caution 1 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent people from becoming addicted to the game, and in the "Caution 2" part (Caution 2 part), a warning display is displayed to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming addicted to the game. A warning message is displayed to prevent physical accidents.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the demo movie display, after the start condition is satisfied, various demo images are displayed in the order of the first scene, second scene, third scene, and fourth scene. The display period tb2a of the first scene is about 10 seconds (tb2a=10 seconds), the display period tb2b of the second scene is about 30 seconds (tb2b=30 seconds), and the display period tb2c of the third scene is about 10 seconds (tb2c= 10 seconds), the display period tb2d of the fourth scene is about 10 seconds (tb2d=5 seconds), and the display period tb of one demonstration movie display is about 55 seconds (tb2=55 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 30, if the first demo movie display ends without the end conditions E2 to E4 being satisfied during the display of the demo movie display, that is, if any of the start conditions S1 to S5 are satisfied. When the first demonstration movie display that has been started ends under the termination condition E1, the process shifts to a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

During the period when the demo movie display is displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the number of reserved memories and the small symbols is maintained (Fig. 31, (See Figure 32). In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie is being displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The numbers and small designs may be hidden.

In addition, during the period when the demo movie display is displayed on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and the frame lamp (main lamp 9a). and side lamps 9b), the light emission is controlled based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration described later), while button lamp 9e is lit in white, which does not correspond to the demonstration movie display. Light emission control is performed based on a default brightness data table (lamp data table to be described later: button lights up white). Further, although BGM is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R, music for displaying a demo movie may be output.

The brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table to be described later: customer waiting demo) is composed of a plurality of brightness data tables (grandchild tables to be described later).

Specifically, as a brightness data table (grandchild table described later) of the main lamp 9a that constitutes a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part is used. , brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part to model introduction 2-3 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of main title part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, period of subtitle part 2 and a brightness data table corresponding to the period from attention-calling part 1 to attention-calling part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table in each period.

In addition, it can also be used as a brightness data table (grandchild table described later) of the side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f that constitute the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo). , a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-1 part. Corresponding brightness data table, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-2 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 3-2 part, brightness data table corresponding to the period of model introduction 2-3 part , a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of alerting part 1 to alerting part 2. A luminance data table is provided, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table in each period.

Note that control using the brightness data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of operation of demo movie display)
Next, an example of the operation of displaying a demo movie will be described based on FIGS. 31, 32, and 119 to 121. In addition, in FIG. 119, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing operation examples of character display and light emission mode in each scene. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an operation example in which (A) is the first scene, (B) is the third scene, and (C) is the fourth scene. FIG. 121 is a comparison table showing character animation display.

In addition, an example of the expression showing the display mode used in the following explanation will be explained.
"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes, whereas "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes. This is a display that decreases the transparency (transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (video display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image. , the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Static display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the display mode at all by not changing the visibility of the image compared to the image one frame before. display).

In addition, an example of expressions indicating a light emission mode used in the following description will be explained.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of brightness data, and there is less change in brightness between each data than the following flash, for example, the brightness of a lamp increases at a predetermined period, This is a pattern in which the color changes at a predetermined period, or in which a predetermined color emits light moving within a light emitting area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp on is not enough as a performance element, or when it is desired to emphasize the image display device 5 etc. rather than the lamp, as in the case of the flash below, so that the lamp does not stand out too much.

“Flash” is a light emission pattern that alternately uses brightness data with high brightness and brightness data with low brightness (including turning off). Depending on the strength of the light, the brightness that the player sees can be greatly changed, and this is a light emitting pattern used for emphasis.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display of FIG. 26(B) is executed in the low base state and when the effect of FIG. 27(D) is executed in the high base state. In this example, a rainbow wave pattern is created in which the brightness data of seven colors is sequentially changed to light up in waves. A rainbow flash pattern may be used by alternating the brightness data.

As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, when the demo movie display start condition is satisfied, the first scene starts to be displayed. Note that, as will be described later, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before the first scene starts to be displayed. In the first scene, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting of a blue corporate slogan display 004SG302A and a corporate logo display 004SG302B is displayed with a "small" in the center of the screen. After being displayed in the same size, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed moving from the back of the display screen to the front by gradually increasing the size and decreasing the transmittance (transparency). can be shown. Incidentally, the number of pending memories and the small symbols remain displayed in the display area 5S at the upper left of the display screen. In this way, by displaying the small symbols even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can be made aware that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set in a lighting mode (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. (color, brightness, etc.) changes. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change.

To explain in detail using FIG. 120(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in the "small" size at the center of the screen, and then the transmittance (transparency) is decreased while gradually enlarging it for about 3 seconds. When the company name display 004SG302 collides with a wall and is bounced back, a bounce display is displayed. (See Figure 120 (A2)). Then, after being statically displayed at a specified position in the center of the screen for about 4 seconds (see FIG. 120 (A3)), it is faded out for 1 second (see FIG. 120 (A4)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then turn on in white. In this way, by flashing white at the start of displaying the demo movie, it is emphasized that the display of company name display 004SG302 has started. Then, as the company name display 004SG302 expands and fades in, the brightness increases (white fade-in lighting), and after a white flash in conjunction with the bound display of the company name display 004SG302, it lights up in white. The brightness decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out lights).

Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene starts, the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D appearing in various productions and the character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character are displayed in sequence ( At the same time, effect display 004SG502 is displayed in the background (see FIGS. 31(C) to 31(F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 119 (A2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in the color corresponding to the character in accordance with the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of the name, and then turn on white. do.

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model Introduction 2-1" begins, the enemy character 004SG510A that appears in various productions is displayed as an animation, and the text "Enemies are rampaging in the city!" Display 004SG511A is displayed in a fade-in manner (animation display) (see FIGS. 31(G) and (H)). Next, when the display of the "Model Introduction 3-1" part starts, the background display 004SG503 showing the city and the ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the situation where the ally character is flying and rushing through the city is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 31(I)).

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model introduction 2-2" starts again, the friendly character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" fade in (animation display) ) (see FIGS. 31(J) and (K)). After that, when the display of "Model Introduction 3-2" starts, the ally character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed in which the effect display 004SG504 is displayed in the background (see Figure 31 (L)). .

Next, when the display of the second scene "Model introduction 2-3" part starts again, the image of the friendly character 004SG500A and the enemy character 004SG510A fighting and the text display "Don't lose!" 004SG511C fade in. (animation display) (see FIGS. 32(M) to (N)). After that, all of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the character display 004SG511D saying "All gather!" are faded in (animated) (see FIG. 32(O)).

In addition, the animation display of the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene is an animation display with movements such as enlargement, contraction, and fighting of the ally characters, whereas various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D , 004SG511A to 004SG511D, for example, are displayed in a fade-in manner at the start of display, and are displayed as animations that have a lower degree of change in visibility than animation displays that involve movement such as the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (A2), in the second scene, "Model introduction 3-1" and "Model introduction 3-2" are displayed on the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). Sometimes there is a green flash, but basically it is a white wave light, and the light emission mode (for example, lighting, blinking, (lights out, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or not) change, and basically, the lights emit light in conjunction with dynamic animation displays such as the running, jumping, and punching of friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy characters 004SG510A. The appearance (for example, lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes.

Specifically, for example, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) may light up or blink (flash) in accordance with the movements of the friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D or the enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, or punching. The color may change.

Note that in the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the light emitting mode of the main lamp 9a may also be changed in the same way as the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e). good.

Next, when the display of the third scene starts, the effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and the model main title name display 004SG520A, which consists of the words "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed at the center of the display screen. After being displayed in "small" size at (default display position), the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed by gradually expanding and fading in (animation display) while decreasing the transmittance (transparency). It can be made to appear as if the screen is being displayed moving from the back side to the front side (see FIGS. 32(P) to 32(R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B consisting of the characters "II" is displayed in "extra large" size on the right side (default display position) of the model main title name display 004SG520A, and then the transmittance (transparency) is adjusted while being slightly reduced. It is displayed in a fade-in manner while decreasing the size, and is displayed in a bound manner in a "large" size on the right side (default display position) of "FEVER POWERFUL" (see FIGS. 32(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "All members gathered Ver." is displayed in "extra large" size in the center in front of the model main title display 004SG520A (default display position), and then shrinks slightly and displays "FEVER". 32 (U) to (V)).

Also, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are basically lit in a rainbow wave, and are linked to the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C and 004SG520C. The light emission mode changes. In particular, in the "Model subtitle name" part, when the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C is moved and displayed and bound to the specified display position, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) flash (blink). .

Using FIG. 120(B), to explain in detail the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "All members gather Ver.", "Extra large" is displayed in the front center (standard display position) of the model main title name display 004SG520A. After being displayed in the size (see Figure 120 (B1)), it shrinks slightly for about 0.5 seconds, moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (default display position), and is displayed in the "Large" size. (See FIG. 120 (B2)) and is statically displayed at the specified display position for 0.5 seconds (See FIG. 120 (B3)). Thereafter, the entire model title display 004SG520, consisting of the model main title display 004SG520A and the model subtitle display 004SG520B, 004SG520C, is gradually enlarged (animated) over approximately 1.5 seconds (Fig. 120 (B4) )reference).

In addition, as shown in Figure 119 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a rainbow direction (rainbow wave lighting) when the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and the model subtitle name When display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, a white flash is performed in conjunction with the enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then rainbow lighting (rainbow wave lighting) is performed.

Next, when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts, the dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the center of the screen (animation display ) (see FIG. 32(W)). Next, when the display of the "Caution 2" part is started, the display is switched to the black caution background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 32(X)).

To explain in detail the display of the "Caution 1" part using FIG. 120(C), when the display of the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts, a dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed. At the same time, the anti-immersion display 004SG312 is displayed at the standard display position in the center of the screen, and fade-in display (animation display) is performed for 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 120 (C1) and (C2)). Next, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is statically displayed for 2 seconds after the transmittance reaches 0% (see FIG. 120 (C3)).

Additionally, as shown in Figure 119 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are linked to the fade-in display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 in the "Caution 1" and "Caution 2" parts. In the fourth scene, the white wave lighting continues without a white flash.

In addition, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) change their lighting modes (for example, lighting, flashing, turning off, Since the color, brightness, etc.) do not change, the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphatically than the company name display 004SG302, the model main title name display 004SG520A, and the model subtitle display 004SG520C, 004SG520C. .

(Comparison of display modes of each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28(B) and with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the display manner of each scene on the image display device 5 during display of the demo movie will be compared.

<Display mode when character display starts> 1st scene (company name), 2nd scene (model introduction 1, 2), 3rd scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), 4th scene (warning 1) In , various characters are displayed in a fade-in manner (displayed in animation), while in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (attention alert 2), various characters are not displayed in a fade-in manner (displayed in animation).

<Character animation display (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), animation display is performed when the degree of change in visibility is "large". In the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), an animation is displayed with the visibility change degree as "medium", and in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 1), the visibility change degree is "medium". While the animation indicating that the degree of gender change is "small" is performed, the character display is not animated in the second scene (model introduction 3) and the fourth scene (warning 2).

<Text size> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name), the text is displayed in "small" size and then enlarged to "large" size, while in the fourth scene In (Caution 1 and 2), characters are displayed at a constant size of "small" or "medium" from the beginning. In addition, in the second scene (model introduction 1 and 2), the text is displayed in "medium" size, and in the third scene (model subtitle name), the subtitle text is displayed in "extra large" size and then reduced to "large" size. and display it.

<Background color> The background color is white in the first scene (company name), the color according to the story in the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), and the title in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) In the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue and the warning 2 part is black.

Regarding character display, for example, when displaying animation, the degree of emphasis is higher than when displaying no animation (highlighted mode), and when the change in visibility in animation display is large, The degree of emphasis will be higher than when the change in visibility is small (the mode of emphasis), and the degree of emphasis will be higher when there are many colors of text than when there are few colors (the mode of emphasis). ).

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name) is performed after the text display is faded in. , the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) is displayed in a fade-in manner, but the size is enlarged as it is displayed in a bound manner. '', the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of the immersion prevention display 004SG312, that is, the visibility of the character display is changed to a higher degree.

In addition, in the animation display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display was faded in to the specified display position. After that, the size increases, decreases, or moves. However, in the animation display of immersion prevention display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), the character display fades in to the specified display position. The animation display of company name display 004SG302 is emphasized more than the animation display of immersion prevention display 004SG312 because it is only displayed and does not change in size without expanding, reducing or moving. In other words, it is a mode in which the degree of change in the visibility of character display is high.

Here, based on FIGS. 120 and 121, the character animation displays of the first scene (company name), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1) will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is enlarged and faded in at the beginning of the display (see FIG. 120 (A1)), and when displayed at the specified position, it is displayed in a bound manner (see FIG. 120 (see (A2))), and after the specified position is displayed, it is displayed statically (see FIG. 120 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), when the display starts, the model main title name display 004SG520A is enlarged and faded in, and then displayed statically when displayed at the specified position (see Figures 32 (P) to (R)). ), after the specified position is displayed, it is enlarged (see FIG. 120 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is enlarged at the start of display and then reduced (see Figures 120 (B1) and (B2)), and is displayed statically when displayed at the specified position (see Figure 120 (B1) and (B2)). 120 (B3)), and after the specified position is displayed, it is enlarged (see FIG. 120 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in a fade-in manner at the start of the display (see Figures 120 (C1) and (C2)), and is displayed statically when the specified position is displayed and after the specified position is displayed. (See FIGS. 120 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is such that company name ≧ model title (main, sub) > alert. The alert is only a fade-in display at the start of the display, and there is no animation display when or after the prescribed position is displayed, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, because the company name is displayed as an animation in two places: when the display starts and when the specified position is displayed, the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the alert. Because animation is displayed in two places, the degree of emphasis is higher than that of a warning.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text display, but since we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, we highlight each piece of information by displaying it with its own display animation. However, compared to the scene in Alert 1, by emphasizing the animation display of the company name and model title display scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, it is possible to attract more suitable customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the characters of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C are faded in and displayed at the specified display position, and then the size is enlarged or reduced. In contrast, in the fourth scene (warning 1), after the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is faded in to the specified display position, an animation display that enlarges, reduces, and moves the size is displayed. Display without.

In this way, by adding a lingering movement to the display of the model title name, it gives a sense of attention to the title, and by avoiding the lingering movement to call attention, the characters can be read clearly. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(Comparison of company name and warning display format)
Here, based on FIGS. 33 and 34, the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols will be compared.

As shown in FIG. 33(A), in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. 004SG302 is displayed. In addition, the number of pending memories and small symbols are displayed in the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), in the fourth scene (warning 1), the caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is animatedly displayed at the center of the screen. The addictive prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a heading display 004SG313 consisting of the words "Pachinko and Pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation." and a heading frame display 004SG314 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle, which is the background of the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is switched and displayed, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 is composed of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A includes an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation in which a player hits his or her head on the protruding part of the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Be careful over your head", and a heading display "The upper part protrudes". Caution details display 004SG325A consists of the words "Please be careful not to hit your head.", caution mark 004SG326A consists of the words "!" inside a triangular mark, and an "x" mark. It consists of attention mark display 004SG327A.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B includes an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which a player's fingers are caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the casing, a heading display 004SG324B consisting of the words "Be careful of finger pinching", and a heading display 004SG324B that says "Beware of finger pinching". The warning detail display 004SG325B consists of the words ``It moves. Be careful not to get your hands or fingers caught.'', the caution mark 004SG326B consists of the words ``!'' inside a triangular mark, and the ``↓'' mark. It consists of attention mark display 004SG327B.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the first scene (company name), the size of the characters of the corporate slogan display 004SG302A is "medium" and the color is chromatic (blue), and the size of the characters of the corporate logo display 004SG302B is "Large", the color is chromatic (blue), and the company name background display 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In the fourth scene (warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is set to "medium" in size and the color is achromatic (white), and the color of the heading frame display 004SG314 is set to a chromatic color (dark blue), The caution background display 004SG311 is a chromatic color (light blue). Further, the frame line of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Note that the background of the character display of the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the caution background display 004SG311 that covers the entire area of the display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314 that is provided in a part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A has a size of "large" and a color achromatic (white), and the text of the heading display 004SG324A has a size "medium" and a color achromatic (white). ), and the characters of the caution detail display 004SG325A are "small" in size and achromatic (white), and the caution mark 004SG326A is "medium" in size and chromatic (yellow), and the caution mark is "small" in size and achromatic (yellow). The mark display 004SG327A has a size of "small" and a chromatic color (red), and the caution background display 004SG321 has an achromatic color (black).

Note that the "caution marks 004SG326A, 004SG326B" are marks that help the headline letters that call attention to the players stand out, and the "caution mark displays 004SG327A, 004SG327B" indicate areas that the players should pay attention to. These are marks that assist illustrations, and unlike text, they are displayed as a single mark, so they are preferably chromatic so that they stand out more than the achromatic heading text.

Regarding the number of retained memories and small designs, the size is "small" and the color is achromatic (black).

As shown in FIGS. 33(A) and 34, when comparing the display modes of the company name display 004SG302 and the number of reserved memories and small designs in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B are , the font size is larger, the number of displayed colors used is larger, and the saturation and brightness of the tone are higher than the number of retained memories and small designs, so corporate slogan display 004SG302A and corporate logo display 004SG302B are It can be displayed more emphatically than the number of reserved memories and small symbols.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and the small design are achromatic (black), but they may be chromatic, and even in such a case, the corporate slogan display 004SG302A or the corporate logo display 004SG302B displays a corporate slogan if at least one of the following conditions is satisfied: font size is larger, number of display colors used is larger, and saturation/brightness is higher than the number of reserved memories and small designs. 004SG302A and company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphatically than the number of reserved memories and small designs.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 33(B), (C), and 34, the addictive prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2) are In comparison, the caution background display 004SG311 is colored in a chromatic color (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314, which is the background of the heading display 004SG313, is colored in a chromatic color (dark blue), while the caution background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black). ).

In this way, the background display color of the warning text is different between the first part of the warning and the second part of the warning, which makes it easier to draw attention to different phenomena such as prevention of addiction and prevention of physical accidents. Since it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching from the first alerting part to the second alerting part, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control as a result.

Next, when comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the addictive prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), The company name background display 004SG301 of the name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the warning background display 004SG311 of the immersion prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), and the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue). ), the caution background display 004SG321 of the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the text display is different between the first scene (company name) and the different fourth scene (alert 1, alert 2), so the display of the company name and the alert are different. By making the background color different, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when switching, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the background display colors of the character displays of the company name background display 004SG301, the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 are all different. The invention is not limited to this, but the background display color of at least one character display among the caution background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the caution background display 004SG321 is the same as the character display color of the company name background display 004SG301. It only needs to be different from the background display color.

(Comparison of lighting modes in each scene)
Next, on the basis of FIG. 28(B) and with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the lighting modes of the lamps in each scene during the display of the demo movie will be compared.

<Interlocking with text animation display> In the first scene (company name), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1), the text animation display (fade-in display) While the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) emit light in conjunction, in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), they are not linked to the character animation display (fade-in display) (non-linked). , the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are made to emit light in conjunction with the animation display of the character.

<Emphasis level> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set to a high emphasis level. In the second scene (model introductions 1 to 3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are emitted with the emphasis level set to "medium", and in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) ), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are caused to emit light with the emphasis level being "low".

The "degree of emphasis" is the degree of emphasis in the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, a flash (blinking), that is, a case where the interval between the color transitions of the luminance data is short, will have a higher degree of emphasis (the mode of emphasis) than a case where the interval between the color transitions of the luminance data is long, such as wave lighting ), when a large number of lamps are lit, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode of emphasis) is higher than when a small number of lamps are lit, and when there are many lit colors, the emphasis is higher than when fewer lamps are lit. The degree of emphasis is higher (the mode is emphasized), and when the proportion of chromatic colors is higher, the degree of emphasis is higher (the mode is emphasized) when the proportion of chromatic colors is lower than when the proportion of chromatic colors is small. When the lights are on, the emphasis is higher (emphasized) than when they are not lit, and when the brightness is high, the emphasis is higher (emphasized) than when the brightness is low. ).

Specifically, to explain based on FIG. 28(B) and referring to FIG. 119, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the degree of emphasis is The second scene (model introduction 1 to 3) has a green flash but is not linked to the character animation display, so the emphasis level is "medium", and the third scene (model main title name, Model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high", and the fourth scene (Caution 1 and 2) is not synchronized with character animation display. Since it is not, the emphasis level is "small".

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is higher when the company name is displayed than when calling for attention, and when the title name is used, the lighting is more emphasized than when calling for attention. The degree of emphasis is higher than the aspect. Since the company name has more lamp switching in conjunction with the animation display than the model title, the lighting mode for the company name is more emphasized than the lighting mode for the model title. Therefore, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is in the relationship of company name>model title (main, sub)>alert.

In addition, since a plurality of plate lamps and a plurality of frame lamps are each provided at a plurality of locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis of the light emission of the first lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps and the emission of light emission of a second lamp consisting of a plurality of lamps, Rather than comparing the degree of emphasis of one first lamp and one second lamp, we compare the light emission mode when the entire first lamp is averaged and the light emission mode when the entire second lamp is averaged. All you have to do is compare.

<Rainbow> In the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), in the "model subtitle name" part (for example, Figures 32 (P) to (V)), the board lamp and frame lamp light up in a rainbow manner. let The brightness data table used at this time (grandchild table described later) is the same as the rainbow brightness data table used in the step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) described above. This is the rainbow brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01) described later).

<Specific light emission> Only in the predetermined frames of the model subtitle name (for example, FIGS. 32 (S) and (U)) in the third scene (title name), the panel lamp and frame lamp emit white flash (specific mode). . The brightness data table used at this time (grandchild table described later) is the brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2, which are different from the brightness data table for main title used in the model main title name, and are the brightness data table for subtitle 2. It is said to be a white flash (specific mode) that emits light in conjunction with character animation display.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the luminance data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2 -1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts (see Figure 29) are used, and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same table as the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 29) is used, and the brightness data table for company (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used. The brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2- The grandchild table corresponding to parts 2 and 2-3) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A that indicates "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1). It does not include brightness data associated with the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511B "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but since we particularly want to convey information about the company name, by using luminance data linked to the display animation, we can compare it with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness for subtitle 2 The luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts) (see Figure 29) is different from the data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the brightness data table for introduction 2 (model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 parts) that is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used. A brightness data table for the main title (a grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), a brightness data table for subtitle 1, and a brightness data table for subtitle 2 (see FIG. 29) are used. The grandchild table corresponding to ) is linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), which includes brightness data, is Luminance data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the character display 004SG511A that shows "Rampaging!" and the fade of the character display 004SG511B that says "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2) Does not include brightness data linked to in-display (animation display).

In this way, in the demo movie display, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since we particularly want to convey information about the model name, by using luminance data that is linked to the display animation, it is easy to compare with other text displays. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see Figure 29) is based on the caution brightness data table. (Grandchild table corresponding to attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts) (see Figure 29) is used to control panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). The brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (Fig. 29) is used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), the caution brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the caution 1 and caution 2 parts) is used This mode has a higher degree of emphasis (is emphasized) than the mode of the controlled panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high," and the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle (name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display, so the emphasis level is "high", whereas in the fourth scene (Caution 1 and 2), white flash is used in conjunction with character animation display. Since this is not the case, the emphasis level is "low".

In this way, there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text display, but we want to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, by emitting dedicated light for each. Among them, by emphasizing the lighting mode of the display scene of the company name and model title compared to the warning scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be carried out. It can be carried out.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is changed from the caution brightness data table (warning 1, Aspects of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the grandchild table corresponding to the attention calling 2 part, and the brightness data table for the main title (the grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), The mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) is for caution. The aspect that is emphasized more than the aspect of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts) is (1). Emphasize the company name and model title by using one of the following modes: (2) lighting in many colors, (3) using a large number of light emitting means, or (4) high brightness. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the mode of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is the same as the main title brightness data table (main title part). The panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are controlled using the subtitle 1 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and subtitle 2 parts), subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) ) By emphasizing the company name more than the other aspects, it is possible to emphasize the company name more, and it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, and as a result, it is possible to improve customer waiting control. It can be performed.

In addition, during execution of the demo movie display, the production control CPU 120 uses the rainbow luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) to use the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). ), and when a step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) or a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) is executed, the brightness data table for rainbow (corresponding to step-up effect and cut-in effect) The board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are controlled using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchildren table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) that is used while displaying the demo movie. table) and a rainbow brightness data table (compatible with step-up effects and cut-in effects) used when step-up effects (see Figure 26 (B)) and cut-in effects (see Figure 27 (D)) are executed. is a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow is executed during the game. By using the same brightness data table used for specific performances (for example, step-up performances and cut-in performances), it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

In addition, the rainbow luminance data table (title part , grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), and a demo movie execution period (second period) after the end of the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of the game in the high base state (special state). ) used for the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1 and 2 parts) and the step-up effect that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) (see Figure 26 (B)) (specific Brightness data table for rainbow used when a cut-in effect (see Figure 27 (D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) and high base state (special state) table) and are common brightness data tables (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the light emission mode to rainbow during the demonstration display, it is possible to make the demonstration display more gorgeous, and on top of that, the brightness data table for setting the light emission mode to rainbow can be created in a normal state. By sharing the brightness data table with the brightness data table used for the specific performance and the special performance that can be executed in the special state, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control without increasing the capacity.

In addition, a step-up effect (see Figure 26 (B)) (specific effect) that can be performed in a low base state (normal state) and a cut-in effect that can be performed in a high base state (special state) (see Figure 27 (D)) ) is a performance that definitively notifies that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, so the brightness data table (common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01 )) is also used for demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are based on a plurality of luminance data, and the lighting mode is linked to the animation display of model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C. This is a brightness data table for causing the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to emit light.

In this way, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in this order, and by displaying the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine is completed, so the board lamp and frame lamp are By lighting up the game machine (excluding the button lamp 9e), the title name of the game machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, a plurality of pieces of brightness data constituting the company name brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) include the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b. (first light emitting means) is configured to emit light, and the introductory brightness data table (model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, 3 The plurality of luminance data constituting the grandchild table corresponding to the -2 part is luminance data configured so that the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp emit light, and the main lamp 9a does not emit light.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, but in the company name display scene, both the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light. In the model introduction scene, the board lamp and side lamp 9b (first light emitting means) emit light, but the main lamp 9a (second light emitting means) does not emit light, so that the company name is relatively visible. The first scene displayed can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In this embodiment, the first light emitting means is the panel lamp and the side lamp 9b, and the second light emitting means is the main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second light emitting means is the main lamp 9a. At least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light emitting means that does not emit light in the scene, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light emitting means.

In addition, as a modified example, the performance control CPU 120 uses the introduction 1 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part) corresponding to the model introduction 1 part in the model introduction part of the second scene. The light emitting means (for example, a panel lamp) is controlled, and in the model introduction 2 part, the luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) is used to Control the light emitting means (e.g., panel lamp), and control the second light emitting means (e.g., frame lamp) using the first luminance data table (one's grandchild table) in the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part. You can do it like this.

In this way, while the demo movie is displayed, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but in the company name display scene, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are designed to emit light in a dedicated light emission mode, and the model In the introduction part 1 and the model introduction part 2, the first light emitting means emits light in a dedicated light emitting mode, but the second light emitting means emits light in a common light emitting mode, so that companies can The name display scene can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the model introduction part 1 of the second scene, the production control CPU 120 also controls the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the model main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part). ), brightness data table for model subtitle (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts), brightness data table for alert 1, brightness data table for alert 2 (grandchild table corresponding to alert 1 and 2 parts), and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a different brightness data table for model introduction 1 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 1 part), and in the model introduction 2 part of the second scene. , the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) may be controlled using the first luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction part 1).

In this way, there are multiple situations in which information is conveyed using text displays, but since we want to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each of them has a dedicated light emitting light so that it can be easily compared with other text displays. , can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the execution period of the model introduction scene including the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part (30 seconds) > the execution period of the company name display scene (10 seconds), the model introduction scene including the 1st model introduction part and the 2nd model introduction part The execution period is (30 seconds) > the execution period of the warning display scene (5 seconds), and the company name text display and the warning text display are displayed at display timings other than when the demo movie is being displayed. may be done. In this way, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene, which are displayed only while the demo movie is being displayed, can be emphasized for a longer period of time, thereby providing suitable customer waiting control.

Note that even when the demo movie is not being displayed, it is possible to display a text display of the company name or a text display calling for attention. For example, the text display of the company name and the text display warning may be displayed during the ending period after the end of the jackpot round, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie display may be displayed. It's okay. In this case, in order to maintain the tempo of the jackpot and high base state, the display time may be set shorter than during the demonstration movie display.

(Lamp lighting mode corresponding to gaming status)
Next, the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the gaming state will be explained based on FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the light emission mode of the lamp corresponding to the gaming state. 36, (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement position of the lamp in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in FIG. 35, the board lamps and frame lamps arranged in the pachinko game machine 1 are controlled to change the state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is performed due to a cold start, and when it is controlled to a low base state. It is designed to emit light in different manners when it is in the high base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie is displayed, and when an error notification described later is being performed.

Specifically, during the initialization notification execution period, an initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e are set to "red". ” flashes.

In the low base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "blue" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up as "blue" as the main color. "White" lights up.

In the low-accuracy, high-base state (time-saving state), a time-saving background luminance data table (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "green" as the main color. , the button lamp 9e lights up in white. In addition, in the high-accuracy, high-base state (variable-accuracy state), a brightness data table for a variable-variable background (lamp data table: background variable) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are waveformed with "purple" as the main color. The button lamp 9e lights up in white. Note that, hereinafter, the time-saving background brightness data table and the variable probability background brightness data table may be collectively referred to as a high-base background brightness data table (or a high-B background brightness data table).

During the execution period of the demonstration performance (demo movie display), a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) is used, and the main color of the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b is "white". The light emission mode changes, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white" color.

During the error notification execution period, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b are set to "colors according to the state (low base state, high base state, demonstration effect)". On the other hand, the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the button lamp 9e lights in white.

Note that the "main color" is a color that forms the basic tone of the overall color in each period, and for example, it may be the color that has the highest luminous time and the highest occupancy rate of the luminous area (number of lamps) in each period, It may be possible to emit light in a color other than the above-mentioned colors. Further, a predetermined hue may include a plurality of colors having different brightness, lightness, saturation, etc. When the main color is "blue", it is sufficient if it is a similar color of "blue".

For example, similar colors will be explained based on FIG. 122. Colors have three attributes: hue (tint), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

An example of the above "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in FIG. 122(A), To explain based on (B), in the hue circle of a predetermined number (24 colors in this case), the three primary colors of light are red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F]. When arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees, each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to red (R), When green (G) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to green (G), and blue When (B) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the board lamps include an attacker lamp 9c built in the special variable winning ball device 7 provided at the bottom right of the game board 2, and a movable body provided at the top of the image display device 5. 32, and a decorative lamp 9f built into a decorative body provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Incidentally, as long as the lamps are provided on the game board 2, lamps other than those described above may be included (for example, lamps built into the prize-winning device, etc.).

Further, the frame lamps include a main lamp 9a provided on the top of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b provided on the left and right sides, and a button lamp 9e provided on the push button 31B. Note that lamps other than those described above may be included as long as they are provided in the gaming machine frame 3 (for example, lamps built into the ball-hitting operation handle 30 or the speakers 8L and 8R).

Further, the attacker lamp 9c of the board lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the movable lamp 9d is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of a plurality of LEDs, The side lamp 9b is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of a plurality of LEDs.

Further, FIG. 36(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in FIG. 36(A), and in the following description, for convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 36(B) will be used. It can be expressed.

(Start of customer waiting demonstration performance, fluctuation stop ver.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped until the customer waiting demonstration effect is started will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 42 and FIG. 123. In FIG. 37, (A1) to (A8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state is finished. In FIG. 38, (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing main parts of FIG. 37. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in the low base state. FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration production in a low base state. In FIG. 41, (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance in the high base state. FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of customer waiting demonstration performance in a high base state. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is started by a cold start (power-on with initialization). FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine is activated by cold start. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a low base state. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko game machine is hot-started in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started when the gaming state is the low base state will be explained based on FIGS. 37 to 40.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 39, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts in the low base state, although not particularly shown, if the execution of a preview effect or reach effect has been decided, these effects is executed (see FIG. 37(A1)). During variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden.

In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table. . Further, normal background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when a preview effect or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview effect or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the advance notice effect or reach effect) is set, and the light emission control and the mode corresponding to the effect are set. BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the winning confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent from the CPU 103. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 starts counting (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Note that although the output of BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A3)). , when the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 37 (A4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 37 (A5) to (A8)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on this, control of the light emitting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decoration designs) that are displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration performance. Before switching from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) It is designed to control light emission.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), a combination of determined symbols (decoration patterns) that are out of place is displayed on the display screen in the background of the first background display 004SG081. Displayed as stopped. Further, the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal).

Next, when the demo production start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the first background display 004SG081 to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place is started. , the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decoration patterns) that are out of place gradually increases, and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data 38 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place approaches 100% and the display screen becomes white-out (see FIG. 38 (A42)), the demo movie display starts. (See Figure 38 (A5)).

In this way, the production control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display stops displaying), and A demo movie display is displayed in a second customer waiting period (second period) after the period ends. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demonstration performance, the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: background normal) is changed to the one for the customer waiting demonstration. Switch to the brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the demo movie display starts, the change will be better than if everything were to be started all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demo movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to designate a demo movie display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: BF01, Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 controls the first background displayed on the display screen. The display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are switched to a demo movie display for demonstration performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the start condition S1 of the demonstration effect is satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 and the fade-out display of the decorative pattern ( After the display screen becomes white-out, display of company name display 004SG302 is started. That is, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). ) to start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), while changing the display content from the normal background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switch display) of the normal background display. Switching control is started, but display of a fade-out display (switched display) as a demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demonstration start condition S1 was satisfied.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 of the demo movie display (See FIG. 37 (A5)) starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so it appears that the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed on the board before they are switched to the demo movie display. Light emission control of the lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the customer waiting demonstration will begin.

In this way, the light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first without performing the switching display using the fade-out display as described above, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. This can be prevented (see FIG. 38 (A31), (A32), and FIG. 39).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of displaying the demo movie is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. be. In addition, although a fade display was performed as a switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or even if the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern display are maintained without performing a fade display etc. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 39, if 55 seconds elapse after the demonstration movie display starts without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, the first The demo movie display ends. Then, on the display screen, the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place are displayed, as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer A waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) starts (see FIG. 37 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background, and then to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). Light emission control is performed based on the button lamp 9e, and light emission control of the button lamp 9e is performed based on a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) continues until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. The second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. In addition, from the second time onwards, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are also displayed. Along with the display, the animation display (frame-in display) of menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 starts, and 30 seconds have passed since the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) started. The demo movie display starts (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. This is a common animation display (see FIG. 37 (A3)).

Furthermore, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in FIG. 38, the performance control CPU 120 displays the Before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns to the demo movie display for demonstration production, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data Table: background normal) and starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (variable display is stopped), and displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the customer waiting period, a demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, the panel lamp and The light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is controlled, and the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) are controlled using the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period. At the same time, during the first customer waiting period and the second customer waiting period, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: Light emission control of the button lamp 9e is performed using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) that is different from the one used in the customer waiting demonstration).

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a fixed manner, misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In detail, as mentioned above, when using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), the display mode of the demo movie display Since the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are turned on and blinking in conjunction with each other, for example, when an operation promotion display is displayed that encourages operation of the push button 31B in a production introduction scene, the button If the lamp 9e is turned on, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand and perform a useless operation, so the button lamp 9e is set in a fixed manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to irregular winning or the like in the low base state, the process of starting the demo movie display after the variable display ends is as follows. As shown in FIG. 39, this is the same as the case where variable display of the first special symbol is started in the low base state, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an example of the operation of the customer waiting demonstration performance when the gaming state is the high base state will be explained based on FIGS. 41 and 42.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, although not particularly shown, if the execution of a preview effect or reach effect has been decided, these effects is executed (see FIG. 41 (B1)). During variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden.

In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp have a purple (or green) wave based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background accuracy change (or lamp data table: background time saver)) for constant change (or time saving). Lighting is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit). Further, high B background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when a preview effect or reach effect is executed, a brightness data table for the preview effect or reach effect (lamp data table corresponding to the advance notice effect or reach effect) is set, and the light emission control and the mode corresponding to the effect are set. BGM is output.

Next, when the variable display ends and the winning confirmed symbol combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 41 (B2)), it is determined that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent from the CPU 103. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 starts counting (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins. Note that although the output of BGM is stopped, it may be faded out when a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B3)). , when the animation is displayed by moving toward the right side to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 41 (B5) to (B8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp are switched from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table, and the customer waiting demonstration brightness data Control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e lights up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) continues.

To start displaying the demo movie in this way, the performance control CPU 120 demos the combination of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) displayed on the display screen and the determined symbol (decorative symbol) of the loss. Before switching to the demonstration movie display for production, change from the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: waiting for customer). demo) to control the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

Specifically, during the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), the determined combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) is stopped and displayed on the display screen in the background of the third background display 004SG083. In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time saving, or lamp data table: background variable) for fixed variable (or time saving). The wave is lit in purple (or green).

Next, when the demo production start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the The fade-out display of the confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) starts, and the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG084) and the missed confirmed symbol combination (decorative symbol) gradually increases. The brightness data table for background B (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) is switched to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamp and frame lamp (button 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place approaches 100% and the display screen becomes white-out, the demo movie display starts. (See Figure 41 (B5)).

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops displaying). is displayed, and a demo movie display is displayed in a second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for demonstration production, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table : Switch from the background change (or lamp data table: background time saving) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do.

Therefore, by using a step-by-step design in which the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, and then the demo movie display starts, the change will be better than if everything were to be started all at once. This makes it possible to make the user aware of the start of the demo movie display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to designate a demo movie display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: BF01, Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 displays the third background displayed on the display screen. Display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are switched to a demo movie display for demonstration performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, a fade-out display (switching display) of the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern is started, and after the display screen becomes white-out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the demonstration performance start condition S1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 selects the brightness for the customer waiting demonstration from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). Switch to the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while fading out the display contents from the high base background display to the high base background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie is started for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds after the demonstration start condition S1 is satisfied). ) has elapsed before starting.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 of the demo movie display (See FIG. 41 (B5)) starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so it looks like the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern are demo. Before switching to the movie display, light emission control for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the customer waiting demonstration is started.

In this way, the light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched first without performing the switching display using the fade-out display as described above, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. This can be prevented (see FIG. 38 (A31), (A32), and FIG. 42).

Note that in this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be 0.3 seconds or more and can be changed in various ways. In addition, although a fade display was performed as a switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative The display of the symbol may be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, if 55 seconds elapse after the demonstration movie display starts without the demonstration end condition being satisfied, based on the determination that the end condition E1 of the demo effect is satisfied, The demo movie display ends. Then, on the display screen, a third background display 004SG083 (or a second background display 004SG082) and a combination of determined symbols (decorative symbols) that are out of place are displayed, as well as a menu guide display 004SG401 and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. Then, the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) starts (see FIG. 37 (A4)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp are changed from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) The light emission control is performed based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and the button lamp 9e is switched to the default brightness data table (lamp data table: Light emission control is performed based on the button (white lighting).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) continues until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. The second customer waiting period (demo movie period) is repeated from the second time onwards. In addition, from the second time onwards, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and Along with displaying the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 starts, and the first customer waiting period (demo The demo movie display starts when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movie start waiting period (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. This is a common animation display (see FIG. 41 (B3)).

Furthermore, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 ( Or, before switching the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the demo movie display for demonstration production, wait for customers from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) Switch to the demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) and start controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In addition, the production control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) in the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops displaying). In the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends, a demo movie display is displayed, and in the first customer waiting period, a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: The luminance control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is performed using the background change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table) is used during the second customer waiting period. :Customer waiting demonstration) is used to control the light emission of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), which is the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) ) is used to control the light emission of the button lamp 9e.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. Therefore, by setting the button lamp 9e in a fixed manner, misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant manner in both the low base state and the high base state, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in both the low base state and the high base state. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, the production control CPU 120 uses the board lamp and frame lamp (button In the first scene (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.) during the second customer waiting period, the corporate brightness data table (corresponding to the company name part) corresponding to the first scene is controlled. In the second scene (for example, the second scene (model introduction 1 to 3), etc.) during the second customer waiting period, The board lamp and frame are created using the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the scene (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2 parts). The lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are controlled, and in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 (model introduction 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2 parts) using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) that is different from The button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) in the second scene during the second customer waiting period.

In this way, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted. By setting this, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, the first default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is brightness data for a promotion effect used when a promotion effect (see FIG. 26(G)) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is executed. This is a different brightness data table from the table (lamp data table: button flashes white, lamp data table: button flashes red), and the brightness data that makes up the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights white) is more effective. There are fewer changes in brightness than the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashes white, lamp data table: button flashes red).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the push button 31B operation is being prompted. , it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the operation of the push button 31B is being prompted, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

Further, the default brightness data table may be made up of brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e, and by doing so, the player is informed that the push button 31B is being prompted to operate. Misunderstandings can be prevented, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, although the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided in the gaming machine frame 3, it is not managed using the same brightness data table as the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided in the gaming machine frame 3. By using separate management, it is possible to appropriately design a system to prevent players from misunderstanding that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the production control CPU 120 displays a menu guide display 004SG401 regarding production adjustment and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display). is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the production control CPU 120 displays a menu guide display 004SG401 regarding production adjustment and a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display). is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (see FIG. 41 (B2)), and then , display a demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, in both the low base state and high base state, the guidance display is not displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, thereby preventing unnecessary adjustments to the performance, and allowing the demo movie to be displayed once. After the display ends, there is a possibility that the player is away from their seat, so by prompting the player to adjust the performance immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, we can create a suitable gaming environment. It is possible to encourage players to play games, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, when variable display of the first special symbol is started due to irregular winning or the like in the high base state, the flow of starting the demo movie display after the variable display ends is as follows. As shown in FIG. 42, this is the same as the case where variable display of the second special symbol is started in the high base state, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to irregular winnings, etc., the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance regarding performance adjustment. 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) are not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then the demo movie is displayed. Display. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to irregular winnings, etc., the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and volume/light intensity guidance display. 41 (B2 ), then display the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Alternatively, the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol in either the low base state or the high base state, even after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, immediately after the end of the variable display, By not displaying a guidance display, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and since there is a possibility that the player may have left his/her seat once the demo movie display has finished, By prompting the performance adjustment immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

<Cold start>
Next, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start (power-on with initialization) will be described based on FIGS. 44 and 45.

As shown in FIGS. 44(C1) and 45, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 is started on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power-on designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initializing display 004SG610 starts in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (FIG. 44 (C2)), and a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start blinking in red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the output of the initialization notification sound is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. . Further, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (60 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, when 10 seconds have passed after receiving the power-on designation command and the first game state background designation command, the initialization process ends, the initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 changes. Display starts (see FIG. 44 (C3)). At this time, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden. In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e starts lighting in a blue wave based on the default brightness data table (background normal). White lighting starts based on the lamp data table (button white lighting). Furthermore, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 44 (C4) When the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C5)).

If another 30 seconds have passed since then, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S2 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 44 (C6) to (C9)). In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), control of the light emitting mode based on white is started, and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the brightness data table for default.

Note that since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the low base state shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an example of operation will be explained based on FIGS. 46 and 47 when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in a low base state. do.

As shown in FIGS. 46(D1) and 47, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the low base state, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 is started on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the first game state background designation command is received, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). The button lamp 9e starts lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. Further, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 At the same time, a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 46 (D3)). When the animation is displayed by moving toward the right side to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D4)).

If another 60 seconds have passed since then, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 46 (D5) to (D8)). In addition, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table). Control of the light emitting mode based on white is started based on the data table (customer waiting demonstration), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Incidentally, since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the low base state shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an example of the operation will be explained based on FIGS. 48 and 49 when the customer waiting demonstration performance is started after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started (power-on without initialization) in the low base state. do.

As shown in FIG. 48 (E1) and FIG. 49, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the high base state, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 is started on the image display device 5 from the startup timing. When 3 seconds have elapsed from the startup timing, the special symbol lamps that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start lighting, and the production control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 103. , at the timing when the second and third game state background designation commands are received, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are set to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: Purple (or green) wave lighting starts based on the button lamp 9e's default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the button lamp 9e starts lighting in white based on the button white lighting, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts counting (90 seconds), and a first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation commands from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the third background The display of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is started (see FIG. 48 (E2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, when 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started counting without the demo end condition being satisfied, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (FIG. 48 (E3)). When the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E4)).

If another 60 seconds have passed since then, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start wait timer started counting without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo production start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, a customer waiting demonstration performance is started, and on the display screen, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, a demo movie display is displayed, and a second customer waiting period (demonstration performance period) is started. (See Figures 48 (E5) to (E8)). In addition, panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can be changed from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), control of the light emitting mode based on white is started based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is set to the default brightness data. White lighting continues based on the table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

Note that since the subsequent flow is similar to the flow in the high base state shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a hot start is made thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and a volume/light amount guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and instead of displaying the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ) (see FIG. 46 (D2) and FIG. 48 (E2)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start displaying, and the corresponding The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a cold start is performed thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and a volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display ) is not displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed (see FIG. 44 (C3)), and then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the start-up situation before a game store opens can be either a hot start (power-on without initialization) or a cold start (power-on with initialization). However, the game store clerk can check the display by checking the background display after turning on the power, checking the demo movie display, and checking the guide display, increasing the efficiency of checking. Furthermore, if a background display is displayed when a game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be a background display with a guidance display, so the guidance will be clearly provided from the timing of the start of the game to the production adjustment. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment to the players, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or a cold start, after the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed. Although the demo movie display is started after 004SG402 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first background display 004SG081, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) After this is displayed, the demo movie display may be started without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, when the power is cut off in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the low base state and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays the menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and the volume - Display the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the light amount guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 44 (C3) and FIG. 46 (D2)), and then, Display the demo movie display. After the demonstration movie display ends, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed while displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the high base state and the power is turned on afterwards, the performance control CPU 120 displays menu guidance display 004SG401 regarding performance adjustment and volume/light intensity guidance. The display 004SG402 (guidance display) is not displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed (Fig. 48 ( (see D2)), then a demo movie display is displayed. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. Or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, there are two possible start-up situations before a game store opens: a low base state and a high base state. If the background is displayed again after that, there is a high possibility that you have already confirmed the status, so by displaying the guidance display from the timing when the background display starts displaying. , When the background display is displayed when the game parlor is open and welcoming players, the background display will be the one with the guidance display displayed, so it will be possible to provide solid guidance for performance adjustment from the timing of the start of the game, A suitable gaming environment can be provided to the players, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, after the variable display ends, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and for a predetermined period of time. (for example, 30 seconds), the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed with a specific animation (fade-in display) to display the first background display 004SG081, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display). display 004SG082), then displays a demo movie display, and after the display period of the demo movie display has elapsed, menu guide display 004SG401 and volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed as the first menu guide. The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed by displaying the same animation (frame-in display) as the display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402. Display so that it is superimposed on the

In this way, by not immediately displaying the guide display after the variable display ends, we prevent unnecessarily prompting for production adjustments, and once the demo movie display ends, the background display changes from the demo movie display. By prompting you to adjust the performance immediately after switching to , you can encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and also when displaying the guidance display immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display. By displaying the guidance using the same animation as when the guidance is displayed later, it is possible to emphasize that the guidance display has been displayed without incurring any cost, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control. .

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is applied as an animation display for the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement direction , moving speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those mentioned above. Further, the animation display may be in other forms such as a fade-in display, a moving display, or an enlarged display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, 47, 49, and 123, the production control CPU 120 determines whether 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have passed after the variable display ends in the low base state. After the variable display ends in the high base state, the demo movie display is displayed after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) has elapsed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the demo movie in the low base state. Based on the hot start, when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) has elapsed since receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot in the high base state. The demo movie is displayed when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) has elapsed since the power failure recovery designation command was received based on the start. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is longer than 90 seconds (third specific periods tc4, tc5).

In this way, after the end of the variable display, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome, so the longer time tc1, tc2 = 120 seconds is However, after a hot start, the game store clerk is present instead of the player, so by setting tc4, tc5 = 90 seconds, which is a shorter time, the game store clerk can check the demo movie display. This can be done quickly, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, 45, and 123, the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) has elapsed after the end of the variable display in the low base state. After the movie display is displayed and the variable display ends in the high base state, a demo movie display is displayed when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) has elapsed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 cold starts in the low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command based on the startup, the demo movie display is displayed, and the pachinko game machine 1 cold starts in the high base state. The demo movie is displayed when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since the power-on designation command was received based on the startup. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it becomes troublesome. After setting the seconds and cold starting (powering on with initialization), the demo movie display will be displayed immediately, as this is the start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is installed at a gaming arcade. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time, the game store staff can quickly check the demo movie display and learn more about the installed machine, which is a good result. Customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 123, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power failure recovery designation command based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started with hot start in the low base state. When 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since then, a demo movie is displayed, and a power outage recovery designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up with hot start in the high base state. When 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since then, a demo movie display is displayed, and after receiving a power-on designation command based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has started by cold start in the low base state. After 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed, a demo movie display is displayed, and 60 seconds have passed since the power-on designation command was received based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 starting up with a cold start in the high base state. After seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed, a demo movie is displayed. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5) is longer than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

In this way, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a game machine is introduced into a game store, so the demo movie display is displayed immediately. By doing so, the game store clerk can immediately check the demo movie display and learn more about the installed machine, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39, 42, and 45, the production control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) has elapsed after the variable display ends in the low base state. When 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demonstration movie display has finished, the demo movie display is displayed again, and after the variable display has finished in the high base state, 120 seconds (the first specified period) has elapsed. After the period tc2) has elapsed, a demo movie display is displayed, and after 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and pachinko is played in a low base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) has elapsed since the gaming machine 1 received the power-on designation command based on the cold start, the demo movie display is displayed, and the demo movie display ends. After that, when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie display is displayed again, and a power-on designation command is received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by cold start in the high base state. When 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since then, the demo movie is displayed, and after the demo movie display has ended, when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed, the demo movie is displayed again. indicate. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the end of the variable display, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced, and it will be troublesome. A cold start (power-on with initialization) is a start method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced at a gaming parlor, so the demonstration movie will be displayed immediately. By setting tc3 = 60 seconds, which is a short time so that it is displayed in , after the end of the variable display in the low base state, after the end of the fluctuation in the high base state, after a cold start, the demo movie display is displayed once, and the period until the demo movie display is displayed again is By making them common, it is possible to stably display the demo movie, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, after being booted by hot start, a boot preparation display 004SG600 indicating that booting is in progress is displayed (see FIG. 46 (D1) and FIG. 48 (E1)), Control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) at the timing related to displaying the display indicating that it is being activated. , the button lamp 9e is controlled using one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) at a timing related to displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600.

In this way, by emitting light using the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) before the background display is displayed, the panel lamp and frame lamp can be made to be normal at the startup stage. It is possible to confirm whether the light is present, and then seamlessly switch to the lighting mode for waiting for a customer, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance Time elapsed Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends after the elapse of time will be explained based on FIGS. 50 to 52. FIGS. 50A to 50E are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in the low base state. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends over time when the gaming state is the low base state will be explained based on FIGS. 50 and 51.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, in the low base state, the first demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 is met ends when the end condition E1 is met, that is, the demo movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have elapsed since then, the process shifts to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time period of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demo movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the second part of the warning in the fourth and final scene of the demo movie display is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are The button lamp 9e lights up in a white-based luminescence mode based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is lit based on the brightness data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

Then, when the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is satisfied, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal), The panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 50(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E1 was satisfied, the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the second part of the caution alert in the fourth scene gradually changes to black and the black caution alert is displayed. A fade-out display (switching display) that blends with the background display 004SG321 starts (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, after the display screen becomes a black screen and is blacked out, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern start to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen (Fig. 50 ( (see FIG. 50(E)), when the animation is displayed by moving to the right to the specified position, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), it also starts the switching control for switching the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background display including the fade-out display (switch display). , the display of the fade-out display (switched display) as the normal background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was satisfied (see FIG. 50(C) and FIG. 51). .

Specifically, when the termination condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command specifying normal background display to the display control unit 123. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: B10E, sends the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed after the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched, and in particular, the background display starts when the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed. Since the display starts after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, it appears that the board lamp and Light emission control for the normal background of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table) from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). :Background normal) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the normal background display starts, there is no aftertaste after the end of the demonstration display. This can be prevented and, as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the customer during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the low base state. The luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used for control, and during the first waiting period after the second waiting period in the high base state, the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is data table: background normal), and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) for normal background. Control is performed by switching to the brightness data table, and before switching the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081, the normal background brightness data table is changed from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). (Lamp data table: background normal) to control.

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the background display starts, there is no aftertaste when the demo movie display ends. It is possible to prevent the situation from getting worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the situation based on the light emitting mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the establishment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after switching from the background display to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed when the demo movie display switches to the background display. will be started.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends over time when the gaming state is the high base state will be described based on FIGS. 50 and 52.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 52, in the high base state, the first demonstration movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 is satisfied ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, the demo movie display is started. If it ends based on the fact that 55 seconds have elapsed since then, the process shifts to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Thereafter, when a sixth time of 30 seconds has elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period), it is assumed that the start condition S6 is satisfied and the demonstration movie display is started again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demonstration movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(A), when the second part of the last fourth scene of the demo movie display is displayed, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) The button lamp 9e lights up in a white-based luminescence mode based on the brightness data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e is lit based on the brightness data table for default (lamp data table: button white lighting). White lighting is performed.

When the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is satisfied, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in purple (or green) waves (see FIG. 50(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied, and when a predetermined period of time tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was satisfied. Then, a fade-out display (switching display) starts in which the second-part accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends with the black caution background display 004SG321 (FIG. 50(C) reference). Then, after the display screen becomes a black screen and blacks out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed from the lower left side of the display screen. When it is displayed in the frame (see Figure 50 (D)), moves to the right to the specified position and is displayed in animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (Figure 50 (E) )reference).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or Lamp data table (background time saving)) to start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while changing display contents from demo movie display to fade-out display (switching display) Switching control to switch to the 3rd background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern is started, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the background of the high B music is performed as specified after the completion condition E1 is satisfied. It starts after the period tg (tg1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 50(C) and FIG. 52).

Specifically, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first sends a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern to the production control CPU 120, The production control CPU 120, which has received the extended command B11D (or B121), creates a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern. :Starts light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 transmits tg (tg1=0 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative pattern.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) has been switched, and in particular, the background display starts after the predetermined period tg has elapsed since the lighting mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. The background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative patterns start after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have passed, so visually the demo movie display ends and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background Before switching to the display 004SG082) and the display of decorative symbols, the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) for the high B music background is started.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, the production control CPU 120 displays the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting (demonstration) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the high B background display starts, there is no aftertaste after the end of the demonstration display. As a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to accommodate customers during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period after the end of the variable display in the high base state. The luminance data table for waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used for control, and in the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is controlled. Lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) is used to control the customer waiting time before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Control is performed by switching from the demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and from the demo movie display to Before switching the display to 3 background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: Control by switching to background change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, by using a step-by-step design in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched first, and then the background display starts, there is no aftertaste when the demo movie display ends. It is possible to prevent the situation from getting worse, and furthermore, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the state according to the light emission mode of the lamp, and as a result, it is possible to carry out suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the establishment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed after switching from the background display to the demo movie display. While the display of 004SG402 is started, if the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed when the demo movie display switches to the background display. Begins.

(End of customer waiting demonstration production, starting prize winning Ver.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends when the player starts winning a prize will be explained based on FIGS. 53 to 58. FIGS. 53A to 53E are diagrams showing an example of the operation in the case where the demo movie display ends with the start winning in the low base state. 54, (A) to (G) are diagrams showing details of the display mode of FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize win in the low base state. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize win in the low base state. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the second starting prize win in the high base state. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends at the first starting prize win in the high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with the first winning prize when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 53 to 55.

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the low base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met is terminated when the end condition E2 is met, that is, the first demo movie that occurs during the demo movie. If it ends based on the occurrence of a starting winning (the start of the variable display of the first special symbol), the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in white light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first starting prize occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, if the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer The brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: background normal) changes from the standby demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and the blue wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) starts (see FIG. 53(B)). . Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. (See FIGS. 53(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background (variable display) display and the variable display of decorative patterns is started. However, the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols start after at least a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied (see FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 55).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative symbols. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that has received the extended command: B10E normally Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 starts displaying the demo movie after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Switch to normal background display and variable display of decorative designs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when the first start winning occurs and the ending condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the blue wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. On the other hand, the demo movie display is maintained until a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E2 is satisfied, and the variable display of the small symbols is started (FIG. 54(B) reference).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 is satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative symbols is started, and the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols are displayed in the special symbol retention storage display area 5U. After the first pending display 004SG101 is displayed, a shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F is started (see FIGS. 54(C) and (D)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the same as those displayed in the special symbol pending memory display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 54(C) to 54(E). 1 pending display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the pending display is completed, it remains temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C without starting scroll display, and each character performs a variable start action. The fluctuation start action includes, for example, an action in which the character displayed on the character display section 004SG052 moves in a manner different from the scroll display, such as the character displayed on the character display section 004SG052 moving its face or body on the pedestal display section 004SG054 or changing its expression.

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start scrolling display in the order of left, right, and center (see FIG. 52(F)). When scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of slow, medium, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. The transmittance increases gradually, and as the speed increases, the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIG. 52(G) and FIG. 55). In addition, in the low base state (first performance mode), the mode shown in FIG. 54 will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative designs are started after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and the scroll display of decorative patterns, the normal background light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. It turns out.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table) from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). :Background normal) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the first starting condition is quickly established by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the first starting condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, in the low base state, the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is started due to irregular winnings, etc., as shown in FIG. 55. Since the flow is the same as that in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the base state, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with the second starting winning when the gaming state is the high base state will be described based on FIG. 57 and with reference to FIGS. 53 and 124.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the high base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied, ends when the end condition E2 is satisfied, that is, the second starting prize that occurred during the demo movie ( If the demo movie display ends based on the occurrence of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, when the second starting prize occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: The brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: short background time)) changes from the standby demo) to the purple (or green) brightness data table for the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e). Wave lighting starts (see FIG. 53(B); blue wave lighting in FIG. 53(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started. , the variable display of decorative patterns starts (see FIGS. 53(C) to 53(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 changes the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table (background time saving)) to start light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while changing the display contents from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display). The switching control to switch to the display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols is started, but the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative symbols are changed for at least a predetermined period th( from the satisfaction of the termination condition E2). th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 53(C)).

More specifically, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first issues a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Output. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, The production control CPU 120 that received the extended command B11D (or B121) controls the board lamp based on the high B background brightness data table corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern. and starts controlling the light emission of the frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns, the display control unit 123 transmits the extended command B11D (or B121) for a predetermined period th (th1=0 3 seconds), the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124(A), when the second start winning occurs and the ending condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is displayed, the customer waiting demo The brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) The demonstration movie display is maintained until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 is met, and the small Variable display of symbols starts (see FIG. 124(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E2 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started, and a special After the second pending display 004SG102 is displayed in the figure pending storage display area 5U, a shift display in which the second pending display 004SG102 is moved to the active display area 5F is started (see FIG. 124(C)).

In addition, the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the same as those displayed in the special symbol retention memory display area 5U, as shown in FIGS. 124(C) to 124(D). 2 Hold display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the hold display is completed, it remains temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C and does not start scrolling, but the high base In this state, the fluctuation start action of each character is not executed (see FIG. 25(B)).

Then, when the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to be scrolled all at once on the left, right, and center (see FIG. 124(E)). When scroll display starts, the scroll display speed (moving speed) gradually increases in the order of slow, medium, and high speed, and fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image increases in proportion to the increase in display speed. The transmittance increases gradually, and as the speed increases, the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIGS. 124(F) and 124(G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second performance mode, third performance mode), the mode shown in FIG. 124 will be obtained regardless of whether variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

Therefore, the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern starts after a predetermined period th after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. has passed, so visually the demo movie display ends and the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e The light emission control for the high B background (excluding the above) will be started.

In other words, if the first start condition is satisfied when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 lowers the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) from the demo movie display. Before switching the display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the base state, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) If the second start condition is met while the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state. Then, the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, in the high base state, by first switching from the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) can be switched, and the second control can be performed quickly. It is possible to notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in the low base state and high base state, by switching from the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) can be switched quickly. It is possible to notify that the first starting condition or the second starting condition has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to quickly inform the player that the second starting condition has been met and the demonstration movie display has ended.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, in the high base state, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to irregular winnings, etc., is as shown in FIG. 57. Since the flow is the same as that in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the base state, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) to the first special symbol from the demo movie display when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is displayed. Before switching the display to the variable display, control is performed by switching from the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and displaying the demo movie. If a second starting prize occurs while is displayed, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol, the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting Control is performed by switching from the demo) to the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, no matter which starting prize occurs, by first switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can be controlled. By switching, it is possible to quickly notify that a starting prize has occurred and the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from the first value (for example, 0%) to the first value. A scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed so that the second value is higher than the value (for example, 90%), and if a first starting prize or a second starting prize occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, Before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to notify that a starting prize has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of desirable customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 changes the transmittance of the decorative pattern from the first value (for example, 0%) to the first value. A scroll display of decorative symbols is displayed so that the second value is higher than the value (for example, 90%), and when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, the first start winning prize and the second starting winning prize are displayed. If this occurs, before the transmittance of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, the first When a starting prize or a second starting prize occurs, the display is switched from the demo movie display to the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transmittance of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative pattern becomes high, the first start winning and the second starting winning occur. It is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, even if the variable display of the small symbol starts with the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting prize, the transparency of the decorative symbol will not change while the decorative symbol is performing the fluctuation start action. Before the rate changes from the first value, the demo movie display is switched to the background display for variable display of decorative patterns.

In addition, if the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 will respond to the first special symbol from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative symbol reaches 90%. If the display is switched to the variable display of decorative symbols that are displayed, and the second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the display will change from the demo movie display before the transmittance of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. The display is switched to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this way, regardless of whether a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, the starting winning can be achieved. It is possible to notify that the demo movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance, steering wheel operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by operating the steering wheel will be explained based on FIGS. 59 to 60. FIGS. 59A to 59C are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demonstration movie display is ended by a handle operation in the low base state. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a handle operation.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by operating the handle when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 59 and 60. In addition, in the following, we will explain an example of an operation in which the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with a handle operation when the base state is low, but an example of an operation in which the customer waiting demonstration performance ends with a handle operation when the base state is high will be explained. Since the operation example is almost the same except that the background display and lamp data are changed to those for high base, the explanation here will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, in the low base state, when the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied ends when the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, based on the steering wheel operation. After the demonstration movie display ends, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white light emission mode based on the white color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, if a steering wheel operation is detected and the end condition E3 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the end condition E3 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 59(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E3 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed on the display screen. is displayed in the frame from the lower left side of the screen, moves toward the right to a specified position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 59(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E3 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). At the same time, it starts controlling the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e), and also starts switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background (design stop) display. The decorative pattern starts at least after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E3 was satisfied (see FIG. 59(C) and FIG. 60).

Specifically, when the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: B10E, sends the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display. Light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) is started. On the other hand, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the display of the decorative pattern are started after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. Visually, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the guide display, the light emission control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. That will happen.

In other words, when the operation of the batting operation handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 adjusts the brightness for the customer waiting demonstration before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display. Switching from the data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the batting ball operation handle 30 can be operated quickly by switching the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e). For example, it is possible to notify that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E3 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance menu operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended by menu operation will be explained based on FIGS. 61 and 62. FIGS. 61A to 61C are diagrams showing an example of the operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in the low base state. FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a low base state and ending with a menu operation. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the flow of displaying a demo movie in a high base state and ending with a menu operation.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by opening the menu display when the gaming state is the low base state will be described based on FIGS. 61 to 63.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, in the low base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is terminated when the end condition E4 is satisfied, that is, the operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as a menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns starts, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is an operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may be other operations such as the stick controller 31A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in white light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, if a menu operation is detected and the end condition E4 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) start lighting in blue waves (see FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the termination condition E4 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started. Menu display 004SG410 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen, and further in front of first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 61(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal). While starting the light emission control of the panel lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), the switching control for switching the display contents from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 is started, but the normal background display The menu display 004SG410 starts at least after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was satisfied (see FIG. 61(C) and FIG. 62).

Specifically, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 that has received the extension command: B10E sends the normal background and menu display to the production control CPU 120. Light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to display 004SG410. On the other hand, after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 changes the demo movie display to the normal background and Switch to menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 starts after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the lighting modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) have been switched, so the appearance Above, before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative pattern and menu display 004SG410, the light emission control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) is started. That will happen.

In other words, if an operation to display menu display 004SG410 using the push button 31B is detected while the demo movie display is being displayed, the production control CPU 120 switches the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guide display 004SG401. Before that, switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and display panel lamps and frame lamps (except button lamp 9e). ).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed as soon as the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Therefore, when the push button 31B is operated, it can be notified that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E4 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

<High base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demonstration performance is ended by opening the menu display when the gaming state is the high base state will be explained based on FIGS. 61 and 63.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, in the high base state, the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is terminated when the end condition E4 is satisfied, that is, the operation to open menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (first background display 004SG081 in FIG. 61) and decorative patterns starts. , a menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of it. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is an operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may be other operations such as the stick controller 31A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are set based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). The button lamp 9e is lit in a white-based light emitting mode, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

For example, if a menu operation is detected and the termination condition E4 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, then if the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo ) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)), and the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) turn on in purple (or green) waves. is started (in blue in FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period of time th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end condition E4 was satisfied, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the display of the decorative pattern are started. , a volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and a menu display 004SG410 is further displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 61(C)). ).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 selects the high B background brightness data table from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). B Switch to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and start light emission control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). , starts switching control to switch from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082), but at least ends third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410. The process starts after a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since condition E4 was satisfied (see FIG. 61(C) and FIG. 63).

Specifically, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. . Along with this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410 to the production control CPU 120, and sends the extended command :B11D (or B121), the production control CPU 120 reads the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410. Alternatively, light emission control of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is started based on the lamp data table (background time saving)). On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command B11D (or B121) for a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) have passed, the demo movie display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 starts after a predetermined period th after the light emission mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) is switched. has passed, so it appears that the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e The light emission control for the high B background (excluding the above) will be started.

In other words, if an operation to display menu display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) from the demo display is detected by the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082 ) and menu display 004SG410, from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background change (or lamp data table) :background time saving)) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) first, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed as soon as the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched. Therefore, when the push button 31B is operated, it can be notified that the demonstration movie display has ended, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed over a wider area than the display screen, so that the light emission mode changes. Since this is easily visible to the player, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the termination condition E4 has been satisfied and the demonstration movie display has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a menu brightness data table for panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening) )), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the menu brightness data table may be a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: A brightness data table having a different light emission mode from the background time saving) may be set.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance when interruption conditions are met)
In the present embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, termination condition 2 (start winning), termination condition 3 (handle operation), termination If either condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the demo movie display is changed to the normal background display or the main screen without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display when end condition E1 (time elapsed) is met. The display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time can be done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of a sudden change, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting a switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

More specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying the demo movie display in the low base state, if the interrupt condition is satisfied, that is, the end condition 2 (start winning), the end condition 3 (handle operation) , if any of the termination conditions E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, or if the termination condition E1 (time elapsed) is satisfied, the demo movie display is changed to the normal background display without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display. , and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, if the interrupt conditions are met, that is, end condition 2 (start winning), end condition 3 (handle operation), end condition E4. (menu operation), the demo movie display or the third background display 004SG083 ( Alternatively, the display is switched to the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time can be done by inserting a switching display to prevent the appearance of a sudden change, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interrupt condition can be ended without inserting a switching display. By showing the sudden change, by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the interruption and termination, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, termination condition 2 (start winning), termination condition 3 (handle operation), termination condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background is changed from the demo movie display without displaying the fade-out display that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time elapsed) is met. Although the example is shown in which the menu display 004SG410 is displayed on the front side of the display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the present invention is not limited to this, and the display ends when the demo movie display is displayed. If any of the conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without displaying the switching display.

(End of customer waiting demonstration performance error occurrence ver.)
Next, a case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance will be explained based on FIGS. 64 to 67. In FIG. 64, (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of error operation of the payout device associated with winning a prize. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the priority layer. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance started in the low base state. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demonstration performance started in the high base state.

First, one of the errors, the out-of-ball error, will be explained. The out-of-ball error is an error that occurs when no game ball is detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 even though the payout device 004SG031 is operated by the payout control unit.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5) are paid out by the payout device 004SG031 based on the fact that the payout conditions for prize balls are satisfied due to the occurrence of a winning or the like. When a payout operation (for example, a rotational operation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed, a game ball is paid out to a payout passage. When all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the start of the payout operation, the CPU 103 concludes that the payout has been performed normally and ends the payout process. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)) consisting of a mark and the text "Out of bulb error" will not be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will also be described later. No error flashing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when a winning occurs, the payout device 004SG031 puts out a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)). operation) is performed, the CPU 103 detects game balls using the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 in a state where there are unpaid balls (for example, a state where the remaining three game balls out of five have not been detected). It is determined whether or not the period in which no detection is performed continues for a first determination period tl (for example, tl=5 seconds). Then, when it is determined that no game ball is detected within this first determination period tl, that is, it is determined that the period in which no game ball is detected while there are unpaid balls continues in the first determination period tl. , Assuming that the payout has not been performed normally, the payout operation of paying out 5 game balls and the game balls within the first determination period tl until the number of unpaid balls (for example, 5 game balls) is detected. The retry operation of repeatedly performing the detection judgment is continued.

Then, in this retry operation period, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation is completed, in other words, there is a period in which no game balls are detected while there are unpaid balls. If it continues for the second judgment period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl), the CPU 103 may detect an insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, a malfunction of the payout device 004SG031, a ball jam in the payout passage, etc. Assuming that one of the following problems may have occurred, an error designation command indicating the occurrence of an out-of-ball error is sent, and the retry operation is continued.

On the other hand, based on receiving the error designation command, the production control CPU 120 switches the main lamp 9a to blinking red for error notification, while maintaining the previous control of the light emission mode of the board lamp and side lamp 9b. do. Further, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error designation command, error notification is performed by displaying error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)) on the display screen.

In addition, after transmitting an error specification command indicating an out-of-ball error, when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, the CPU 103 sends an error specification command for production control that specifies that the out-of-ball error has been canceled. Send to CPU 120. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, from the time when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, a specific period (for example, 1 Since the error designation command for designating cancellation of the out-of-ball error is transmitted when the time period (seconds) has elapsed, the error notification can be promptly terminated without waiting until all unpaid balls are detected. Further, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk=3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error cancellation designation command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen and the error notification is ended.

In addition, if there are still unpaid balls remaining after sending an error specification command to cancel the error, the retry operation will be started again, and even after the third retry operation is completed, there will be no unpaid balls. If the same number of game balls are not detected, an error designation command for designating an out-of-ball error is sent again, and the performance control CPU 120 restarts the above-described error notification.

<Low base state>
Next, based on FIGS. 65 to 67, we will explain an example of the operation when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. I will explain.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, when variable display of the first special symbol starts in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see FIG. 65(A)). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a blue wave based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default brightness data table. .

Next, when the production control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a bulb out error during variable display, the production control CPU 120 selects panel lamps and frame lamps (button lamps) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). For the main lamp 9a, as shown in FIG. 66, error brightness data (lamp data table: error) is used as brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer. To make the settings, switch to flashing red light emission control (see FIG. 65(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp is set in the normal layer depending on the state. On the other hand, when an error occurs as described above, a luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) is set in the priority layer that is given priority over the normal layer. Then, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) to output brightness data to the LED driver. Then, the main lamp 9a flashes in red. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb out error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the decorative pattern display area 5L of the display screen , 5C, and 5R, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen, and is directed to the right until it reaches the specified position. When the animation is displayed by moving, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 65(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue to be executed.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b is changed to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer (Waiting demo), and control of the light emitting mode based on white is started. Note that even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red (see FIG. 65(E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display is started when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was satisfied (see FIG. 65(F)).

After that, when the out-of-bulb error is canceled at a predetermined timing while the demo movie is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is switched to light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer. , the light emission control of the main lamp 9a is also started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65(G)). At this time, the light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, so from the predetermined point of the demo movie display, the customer waiting demo Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started midway. Further, when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the out-of-ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, in a low base state, a ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol that is started due to irregular winnings, etc., continues even after the demo movie display has started. Regarding the flow, as shown in Figure 65, the flow is the flow when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Since they are similar, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the production control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error to turn on the main lamp 9a. Then, if the bulb out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then the second During the period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the game (for example, a ball out error) is carried over to both the background display and the demo movie display, stable It is possible to notify a bulb out error, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the main lamp 9a is continued to be controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Then, during the second period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the bulb out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period, the out-of-bulb error is resolved. If not, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

<High base state>
Next, based on FIG. 68, we will explain an example of the operation when the ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol started in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display starts. This will be explained with reference to 65.

As shown in FIG. 68, when variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (FIG. 65(A) )reference). In addition, the panel lamp and frame lamp start lighting in a purple (or green) wave based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)), and the button lamp 9e maintains white lighting based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the production control CPU 120 receives an error designation command indicating a bulb out error during variable display, the production control CPU 120 sets the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)). While continuing to control the light emission of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the brightness data of the main lamp 9a in the priority layer, as shown in FIG. In order to set the brightness data (lamp data table: error), switch to red flashing light emission control (see FIG. 65(B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp is added to the normal layer. ) etc. are set depending on the state, while the priority layer that takes priority over the normal layer has a luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. Set. Then, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used preferentially over the brightness data table set in the normal layer (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening), etc.). By outputting the brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a blinks in red. During this time, the production control CPU 120 uses the timer without stopping the time measurement of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening), etc.) set in the normal layer. The value of continues to be updated.

Next, when a predetermined period of time tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb out error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen Error display 004SG700 is displayed (see FIG. 65(C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed in a frame from the lower left side of the display screen, and is directed to the right until it reaches the specified position. When the animation is displayed by moving, the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 65(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red.

In addition, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is satisfied, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b is displayed for the customer waiting demonstration. The display switches to the lamp data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration), and control of the light emission mode based on white is started. Note that even if the demo movie display is started, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to blink in red (see FIG. 65(E)). Thereafter, the demo movie display is started when a predetermined period tf (tf1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was satisfied (see FIG. 65(F)).

After that, when the out-of-bulb error is canceled at a predetermined timing while the demo movie is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is switched to light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer. , the light emission control of the main lamp 9a is also started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65(G)). At this time, the light emission control based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, so from the predetermined point of the demo movie display, the customer waiting demo Luminance data table Light emission control based on the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) can be started midway. Further, when a predetermined period tk (tk1=3 seconds) has elapsed since the out-of-ball error was canceled, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65(G)).

Also, although not shown in detail, when the ball out error that occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol that is started due to irregular winnings in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Regarding the flow, as shown in Figure 68, the flow is the flow when the ball out error that occurred during the variable display of the second special symbol that started in the high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started. Since they are similar, detailed explanation here will be omitted.

In addition, when a ball out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the production control CPU 120 stores an error brightness data table (lamp data table) corresponding to the ball out error. If the bulb burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the high base state is maintained. If a ball out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in , the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the ball out error. Then, if the bulb burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period. If the bulb burnout error has not been resolved, control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the lamp notification of a bulb out error that occurs during variable display in either the low base state or high base state will be carried over and executed both during the background display and the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, when a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 uses an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error. Then, if the burnout error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, control of the main lamp 9a is continued using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Then, during the second period, if the out-of-bulb error is not resolved, the control of the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. If a bulb out error (specific error) occurs during the bulb out error, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb out error, and then the first customer waiting period If the out-of-bulb error is not resolved during the second period, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued, and then during the second period, the out-of-bulb error is resolved. If not, control of the main lamp 9a using the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is continued.

In this way, the notification by the lamp of a specific error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is inherited and executed both during the background display and during the demo movie display. By doing so, stable notification of out-of-ball errors can be performed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are different. Specifically, white is the color that occupies a large percentage of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error ) is the color that occupies a large proportion of the luminance data (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are configured to have different main colors in the brightness data. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emission mode while the demo movie is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that account for a large proportion. . Specifically, while the color that accounts for a large percentage of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) is blue, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: errors) The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to have different main colors in the brightness data, , it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred by the light emitting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

Also, the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) differ in the colors that occupy a large proportion. , the brightness data that makes up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). , the color that occupies a large proportion is different. Specifically, while blue is the color that accounts for the majority of the brightness data that makes up the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal), the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: errors) is The color that occupies a large proportion of the constituent luminance data is red (see FIG. 35). In addition, the colors that make up the majority of the brightness data that make up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time saving)) are green (for time saving) or purple (for variable certainty). On the other hand, the color that occupies a large proportion of the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) are configured to have different main colors in the luminance data, and The main color of the brightness data is now different between the brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). By configuring this, it is possible to suggest that an out-of-bulb error has occurred depending on the light emission mode during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a If a bulb out error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is displayed. and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to be different in the main color of the brightness data. , it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode while the demo movie is being displayed, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is When the side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled and a bulb burnout error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table : background time shortening, lamp data table: background probability change) and error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the colors that occupy a large proportion are different (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the luminance data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background probability variable) are used to By configuring the main colors to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing error notification, a mode is exemplified in which flashing red light emission is controlled based on the error luminance data table set in the priority layer, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when performing error notification, light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error luminance data (grandchild data) that causes a lamp dedicated to error notification to flash in red.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error is notified, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the light emission for the error notification, but the error lamp is used to emit light for the purpose of notifying the game store clerk. Therefore, the main lamp 9a is placed at the highest point of the frame lamp that is not hidden by the player and is most easily noticed by the game store staff, but side lamps 9b or other lamps may be used.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) have different proportions, and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp Data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) have different colors that occupy a large proportion (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the main color of the brightness data is made different between the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and The luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) should be configured so that the main colors in the luminance data are different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred based on the light emitting mode during the background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are displayed on the board that the player visually recognizes. The lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission modes. Specifically, in the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the light emission mode is based on white, but in the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), it flashes in red. (See Figure 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are used to display the panel lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) that are shown to the players. By configuring the display to have different movements (except for can.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error has not occurred during background display, the main lamp 9a is When the side lamp 9b and panel lamp are controlled and a bulb burnout error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error does not occur during the display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and a demo movie is displayed. If a bulb burnout error occurs during the period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table :Background time saving, lamp data table: background change) brightness data, error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp) that are visually recognized by the player. (excluding 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) lights up a blue wave, and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time short)) lights up the blue wave. In contrast to the purple (or green) wave lighting, the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background certain) can be used to By configuring the movement of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) to be shown to be different, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred depending on the light emission mode while displaying the demo movie. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the luminance data that constitutes the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that constitutes the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and the board lamp and The frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes, and are different from the brightness data that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)). The luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are visually recognized by the player is different. Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background short time)) ), the lamp lights in a purple (or green) wave, whereas the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) flashes in red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. ) is configured so that the movement of By configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball-out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The board that is visually recognized by the player includes the brightness data that makes up the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) are configured to have different light emission operation modes, and the brightness that constitutes the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short)) The luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) that are visually recognized by the player is different. . Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), for blue wave lighting, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time short) ), the lamp lights in a purple (or green) wave, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes in red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. ) is configured so that the movement of By configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball-out error has occurred due to the lighting mode during the demonstration movie display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) show the light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a that is visually recognized by the player, the board lamp and The light emitting operation mode is configured to be different from that of the side lamp 9b. Specifically, in the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based light emission mode, and the error brightness is In the data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) can be used to display the board lamp and frame lamp (button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. By configuring the motions of (excluding) to differ, it is possible to suggest that an error has occurred depending on the light emission mode during display of the demo movie, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: short background time, lamp data table: background definite change) and the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) are visually checked by the player. The light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting operation mode of the panel lamp and side lamps 9b are configured to be different. Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: background fixed), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in blue wave. , the green wave is lit or the purple wave is lit, and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks in red, and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a manner according to the state (Fig. 35 reference).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for backgrounds (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background certain) can be used to By configuring the display lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to differ in their movements, it is possible to suggest that a bulb out error has occurred depending on the lighting mode during background display, and as a result, Suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in a low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal). If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the variable display in the low base state ends. If no out-of-bulb error occurs during the subsequent demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the high base If a bulb burnout error does not occur during background display in the state, the main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b are If a bulb burnout error occurs during background display in a high base state, control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and display the main lamp 9a in a high base state. If no bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and If a bulb burnout error occurs during the demo movie display period after controlling the panel lamp and ending variable display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are used to determine the light emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a that is visually recognized by the player, the board lamp and The light emission operation mode of the side lamp 9b is different from that of the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time short)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The light emitting mode of the main lamp 9a and the light emitting mode of the board lamp and side lamps 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different from each other. Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue waves, and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data Table: background change (or lamp data table: background time short)), the purple (or green) wave lights up, error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp And the side lamp 9b lights up in a manner according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal background (lamp data table: background normal) are used to display the panel lamps and frame lamps (except button lamp 9e) that are shown to the player. The brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time shortening)) are configured to have different movements. By configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to be different, it is possible to suggest that a ball out error has occurred depending on the lighting mode during background display. As a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

The above-mentioned light emission operation mode is a light emission mode that allows the player to see some kind of movement, such as blinking: a mode in which the light turns on and off alternately, and shaking (haze): a change in brightness. (such as changing from RGB:700 to RGB:400), and lighting and extinguishing with no change in brightness are not included in the light emission operation mode. For example, in the case of shaking (moya), the specific light emitting means is set to the first brightness (RGB is 100) between the first brightness data xms (or the combination of the brightness of the first color, second color, and third color) (or each luminance of the first color, second color, third color) The previous brightness data is based on the brightness of a specific light emitting means. It is preferable that the values are different.

In addition, if the game ball payout condition is met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error will occur, and the performance control CPU 120 will be activated during the second customer waiting period. If a game ball exceeding the unpaid number is distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) when a ball out error occurs during the game, and game balls that do not exceed the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In any case, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) to the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp will be demonstrated at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball. By switching to the light emitting mode corresponding to movie display, the demo movie display can be displayed without any discomfort, and the processing can be shared, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, if the game ball payout conditions are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error will occur, and the performance control CPU 120 will not be able to detect the game ball during the first customer waiting period. If a game ball exceeding the unpaid number is distributed to the payout device 004SG031 (payout section) when a ball out error occurs during the game, and game balls that do not exceed the unpaid number are distributed to the payout device 004SG031. In any case, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error ) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: background definite) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls distributed to the payout device 004SG031, at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is changed to the background. By switching to a light emitting mode corresponding to the display, the background display can be made to look natural and the processing can be shared, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for paying out game balls are met and the period in which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) , the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstration (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error), and during the second customer waiting period, the lamp When a run-out error occurs and a specific period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball. Then, the panel lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demonstration brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo).

In this way, if the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detected, there is a possibility of a ball out error, but there is also a possibility of a delay in the ball, so do not change the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp immediately. First, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp to the lighting mode that corresponds to the demo movie display, the demo movie display can be shown without any discomfort, and as a result, it is possible to attract more and more customers. Waiting control can be performed.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for paying out game balls are met and the period in which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) , switch from the background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background short time, lamp data table: background variable) to the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and change the panel lamp and frame lamp. control, and when a ball out error occurs during the first customer waiting period, after the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the game ball, a specified period shorter than the second determination period tm (or first determination period tl) is determined. When a period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the brightness data table for background (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time short, lamp data table: (background change) to control the panel lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, if the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect it, there is a possibility of a ball out error, but there is also a possibility of a delay in the ball, so do not change the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp immediately. First, when a game ball is detected, by immediately switching the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp to the lighting mode corresponding to the background display, the background display can be made to look natural, resulting in suitable customer waiting control. It can be performed.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 transmits brightness data for lighting/blinking/turning off one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Output to the LED driver (also called lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a lamp data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in a normal state (background normal shown in FIG. 77), a fanfare background lamp data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot background lamp data table. A lamp data table for a jackpot background used during a round in a gaming state, a lamp data table for an ending background used in an ending state in which an ending effect that notifies the end of a jackpot gaming state is executed, and a lamp data table for an ending background used in a variable probability state. A background lamp data table (background probability variation shown in FIG. 77), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (background time-saving shown in FIG. 77), and a customer-waiting lamp data table used in the customer-waiting state (Fig. (Customer waiting demonstration shown in 77).

Each of the above-mentioned background lamp data tables is used without overlapping, and can be used to select one of multiple types of game states such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, variable probability state, time saving state, and customer waiting state. Depending on whether the game state is being controlled, one of the background lamp data tables is used. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on the background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the priority level is increased when the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table are used in this order.

For example, if a super reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on a normal background lamp data table in a normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect. It is used preferentially over the normal background lamp data table, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table and a super reach effect develops, the SP reach lamp data table of the game effect lamp 9 is changed. For lamps for which brightness data is not set based on the background lamp data table, the lamps are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table, but among the game effect lamps 9, lamps for which brightness data is set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled. The lamp is controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach lamp data table. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the lamp data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, for the lamp for which brightness data based on the lamp data table for SP reach is set, the brightness based on the lamp data table for background No data is output to the LED driver, and when the normal state returns after the super reach effect ends, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. In addition, after the super reach effect ends, if there is a jackpot and a fanfare state occurs, the brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and for any lamp, the fanfare background lamp data table The lamp is controlled in a manner based on

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and controls the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when a super reach effect develops, the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially than the background lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background lamp data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, but the background lamp Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state, or outputs brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during the super reach performance. If an error occurs, the lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set among the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, for the game effect lamps 9 whose brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used as the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data. It is used preferentially over the table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, among the game effect lamps 9, the lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table are not set are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. Among the effect lamps 9, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table for the lamps for which brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table. In addition, during the period when brightness data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data is set based on the error lamp data table, the background lamp data table or SP reach lamp The brightness data based on the data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the game state during super reach effect, it is output to the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. The brightness data based on this is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the normal background lamp corresponding to the normal state while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach production under control using a timer. Brightness data is output to the LED driver using the data table and SP reach lamp data table that corresponds to the super reach effect, but when an error occurs, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is output to the background lamp data table. The brightness data is outputted to the LED driver using priority over the lamp data table for SP reach. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, the production control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error lamp data table. However, since the luminance data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table have a lower priority than the luminance data included in the error lamp data table, The luminance data included in the lamp data table for use in the LED driver is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the error is cleared, the production control CPU 120 outputs the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated. start. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver. .

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 include "unlit,""substantiallyunlit,""lit," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights up in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the LED in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a mode other than "lights out" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. The two differ from each other in that blinking is that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

[Explanation regarding game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 70 to 76.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses the lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 when the sub variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part. I do. The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) and sends the extended command to the production control CPU 120.The production control CPU 120 controls the display control by the display control unit 123 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123. The address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed is specified.

FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in FIG. 70, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs predetermined display control, it transmits an extended command (BXXX) for specifying the display control to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control.

In the parent table, information specifying which lamps are to be controlled (lit locations or unlit locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and lamp control information corresponding to the lamps to be controlled. Information that specifies the child table that is referenced at the time of the lamp control, and information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 72, the side lamp 9b is designated as the target of lamp control. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and lamp control is performed by this child table. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time. In addition, in the parent table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 72, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information in the parent table that was last set before then continues.

As shown in FIG. 70, the production control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, when 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time. In order to time this 600000ms (10 minutes), the counter is decremented by 1 every 10ms. That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives another extended command before timing a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving the extended command, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the lamp control that is currently being executed, and restarts the lamp control. The lamp control of the target lamp is performed using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). Therefore, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can continue for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table contains information specifying a grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 73, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), grandchild table: Execution time for ramp control: 500ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 and execution time for ramp control by this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for grandchild table: The order in which lamp control is executed using the grandchild table is specified. In addition, in the child table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 73, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information of the child table that was last set before then continues.

As shown in FIG. 70, when performing lamp control on a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, for example, the production control CPU 120 uses the first specified grandchild table to perform lamp control on the target lamp. After performing ramp control for the target lamp and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the next step is to perform ramp control for the target lamp using the specified grandchild table, for all specified grandchild tables. They are to be performed in the specified order. For example, with the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the side lamp 9b, the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until the first 500 ms is measured, and then the lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the time is measured for 500 ms. , Next, ramp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then ramp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is measured. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control using the grandchild table specified at the end is 600000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). By setting, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In addition, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is the target of lamp control, one grandchild table is used as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, for example, as shown in FIG. :XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 may be specified, and although not shown, two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1 may be specified. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the production control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to The same lamp control is performed for both the lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the production control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables. The left side lamp 9b is controlled by the left side lamp 9b, and the right side lamp 9b is controlled by using the other grandchild table. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b have a common table. While lamp control is performed, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

The grandchild table specifies the brightness data to be referenced during lamp control and the execution time for performing lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. information is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the grandchild table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 74, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms , Brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00000 0, 0x000000, 0x000, lamp according to this brightness data Execution time for control: 120ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA 5AA , 0x5AA, an execution time of 40 ms for lamp control based on this luminance data is specified in the order in which lamp control based on these luminance data is executed. In addition, in the grandchild table, for the lamps for which corresponding information is not stored among the game effect lamps 9 (in FIG. 74, the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e), Lamp control based on the information in the grandchild table that was last set before then continues.

In the luminance data of the left side lamp 9b and right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the grandchild table shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and No. 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 are the values of the second lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the second lamp, and the values of the lower fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values of numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the corresponding data indicate the RGB values of the 5th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 5 and 6 The value of the digit indicates the RGB value of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the value of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and 8 is the value of the RGB of the 6th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b are shown, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the eighth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digit values of the data corresponding to number 10 indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 The values in the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b.

Although not particularly shown, when different grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the brightness data of the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~) , the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1 of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 indicates the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values in the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4. The value indicates the value of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the value of the lowest digit to third digit of the data corresponding to No. 3 and 4 indicates the value of the fourth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the lamp of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the lower 1st digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 7 and 8. The value of the 3rd digit indicates the RGB value of the 8th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 9 and 10 are the values of the left side lamp. The RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of the 9b are shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 are the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the 11th lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b. In the brightness data of (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and correspond to numbers 3 and 4. The lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 are the values of the right side lamp 9b. The RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top are shown, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 are the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to No. 8 indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the lower 4 digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 9 and 10 The values in the 6th to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values in the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the right side lamp 9b. The RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top of the side lamp 9b are shown, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 11 are the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. It indicates the value.

Further, although not particularly shown, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) that specifies the movable lamp 9d, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 1 and 2 are the 1st from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Yes, the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, and the lower values of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. The values in the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of the first from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. Indicates the RGB value of the lamp, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and 3 The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the lower 1st to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. The value of the third digit indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the value of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicates the RGB value of the fifth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. This shows the RGB values of the lamp. In addition, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) that specifies the attacker lamp 9c, the values in the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of the first from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. It shows the RGB values of the lamp, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and 3 The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c, and the lower 1st to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. The third digit value indicates the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacker lamp 9c. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) that specifies the button lamp 9e, the values of the first to third lower digits indicate the RGB values of the button lamp 9e.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The main lamp 9a, the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, the attacker lamp 9c, and the button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B". The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and a current of "1" flows to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by flowing current corresponding to the luminance data to each RGB element. . In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can be lit in colors according to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. . As an example, data "F00" is outputted from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. Further, data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. Furthermore, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 70, when controlling the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120, for example, first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, After measuring the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, the process of outputting the next designated brightness data to the LED driver is performed for all the designated brightness data in the designated order. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 is sent to the LED driver until the first 100ms is measured. Output brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms is counted, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00 until the next 120ms is counted. 0000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , Output 0x000 to the LED driver, then output brightness data until 120ms is counted: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver, then 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, until next 40ms is counted. Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA to the LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the specified grandchild table. On the other hand, while outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the child table: 500ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for third lamp control, and grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified as the time for lamp control, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for the side lamp 9b are "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4" 995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA , 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" order is specified to be executed at 100ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms will be referred to as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms will be referred to as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms will be referred to as data 4. .

When performing lamp control for the second designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: The luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on :XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until reaching 500 ms, but after outputting data 1 to data 4, the time is still 500 ms. If the luminance data has not been reached, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 500 ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that point, and outputs the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table. Start.

In addition, when performing lamp control for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: Until the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the time has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 at that time. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will start, but some abnormality must occur. In this case, the time measurement never reaches 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the time measurement reaches 600,000 ms, the parent table, child table, etc. specified by the newly received extended command are displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table will start.

Furthermore, as shown in the parent table shown in Figure 72, 600000ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by the child table, and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. . That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the main board 11, but if some malfunction occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive the production control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp control is performed one after another from the point where the problem occurs. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, as in the child table shown in FIG. 73, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the last specified grandchild table, and the 10 minute data in such a child table is Prevents ramp control from being performed again by the grandchild table specified at the beginning of the child table due to the timer of the parent table still remaining when the value of the timer corresponding to the table becomes 0. play a role.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the last specified luminance data. With this configuration, 10 minutes in the luminance data When the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so lamp control is performed again using the luminance data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table. This will play a role in preventing things from being put away. In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. I can do it. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

[About the lamp data table used during non-gaming 1]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a lamp data table used during non-gaming (only button blinking white and blinking red are used during gaming).

The background normally shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the effect control CPU 120, after the power is restored (when controlled to the normal state), After the end of the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the gaming state, after the end of the fluctuation in the normal state, after the end of the fluctuation of the last game in the time saving state, after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when controlled to the normal state), the normal state After the demo movie ends and after the menu display in the normal state ends, when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B10E that is sent in conjunction with the control to display the normal background image, the normal background image is used. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

The background time saver shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time saver background image, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the operation of the game effect lamps after the power is restored (when controlled to the time saver state). The display control unit 123 displays the time-saving background image after the variation in the time-saving state ends, after the jackpot game state ends (when controlled in the time-saving state), after the demo movie ends in the time-saving state, and after the menu display in the time-saving state ends. When the extended command B11D transmitted in conjunction with the control is received, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the background normal.

The background probability variation shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the probability variation background image. The display control unit 123 displays the background image for probability variation after the fluctuation in the probability variation state ends, after the end of the jackpot gaming state (when controlled in the probability variation state), after the end of the demo movie in the probability variation state, and after the end of the menu display in the probability variation state. When the extended command B121 transmitted in conjunction with the control is received, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the background normal.

The customer waiting demonstration shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration performance. When the unit 123 receives the extended command: BF01 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the image corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the customer waiting demonstration.

The button white lighting shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to non-gaming except during initialization notification, and after the power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 When the extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control section 123 is received after the completion of the operation promotion effect and after the end of the operation promotion effect, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white lighting.

The white blinking button shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e that corresponds to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the operation promotion effect that causes the display control unit 123 button lamp 9e to blink white during the game. When receiving the extended command B002 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the image, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

The blinking button red shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation promotion effect, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation promotion effect in which the display control unit 123 causes the button lamp 9e to blink red during the game. When receiving the extended command B003 transmitted in conjunction with the control to display the corresponding image, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white blinking.

Note that the button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation promotion presentation; , lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using button white lighting. In addition, since the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e are not specified for button white lighting, button white flashing, and button red flashing, the performance control CPU 120 is extended to specify button white lighting, button white flashing, and button red flashing. Even when a command is received, lamp control based on the previous lamp data table is continued for the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e.

The initialization notification shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification, and the production control CPU 120 transmits the lamp data table as the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification. When the extended command: BFFF is received, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using initialization.

The error shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table of the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification, and the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of the error. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the error.

In addition, since the error does not specify any game effect lamp 9 other than the main lamp 9a, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying an error, it will not specify the game effect lamp 9 other than the main lamp 9a. Continues lamp control based on the previous lamp data table.

[Lamp data table: background normal]
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table:background normal parent table used when extended command: B10E is received, and FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table:background normal child table. FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B10E that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a normal background image, the production control CPU 120 creates a background normal parent table based on the extended command: B10E. specify. Background As shown in FIG. 78, the normal parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: When B10E is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the background normal parent table.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 79, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (FIG. 80) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO, as shown in FIG. 80, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: and similar Repeat control. In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600000 ms has passed after the child table: .

As shown in FIGS. 78 to 81, child tables that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c are set in the background normal parent table. In the child table, reference grandchild tables etc. are set, and in these grandchild tables, reference brightness data etc. are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The lamps of the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are controlled in the same manner as above by referring to the child table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table. I do.

Background The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the normal child table refers to for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c is also set to a brightness based on blue, and the side lamp 9b, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on blue.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the normal background parent table, so the lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: background time saving]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of lamp data table:background time saving used when extended command: B11D is received, and FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of lamp data table:background time saving. FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background time saving grandchild table.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B11D that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a time-saving background image, the production control CPU 120 creates a background time-saving parent table based on the extended command: B11D. specify. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the background time saving parent table includes child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , In these child tables, reference grandchild tables etc. are set, and in these grandchild tables, reference brightness data etc. are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp are installed in the same manner as the background by referring to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table. 9f, performs lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background time saving child table refers to for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, brightness based on green is set. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on green.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the background time saving parent table, so lamp control based on the previously set lamp data table (button lit white) continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: background change]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of lamp data table: background probability variation used when extended command: B121 is received, and FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of lamp data table: background probability variation. FIGS. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the ramp data table: grandchild table of background probability variation.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B121 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display a background image for probability variation, the production control CPU 120 creates a parent table for background probability variation based on the extended command: B121. specify. As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the parent table for background probability changes has child tables that refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. , In these child tables, grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp are installed in the same manner as the background by referring to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table. 9f, performs lamp control of the attacker lamp 9c.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of background probability variation refers to for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, the brightness based on purple is set. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also have a lighting mode in which the brightness changes based on purple.

In addition, since the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the background probability change, the lamp control based on the lamp data table (button lit white) that was previously set continues. It will be done.

[Lamp data table: Customer waiting demo]
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when extended command: BF01 is received, and FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of lamp data table: customer waiting demo. FIG. 92 to FIG. 98 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration.

When the display control unit receives an extended command: BF01 that is transmitted when the display control unit performs display control of the customer waiting demo display performance, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01. do. As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to control the main lamp 9a for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: : When BF01 is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 91, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a are set in the order of reference.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 92) which is initially set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: I do. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white over the period of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name.

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. A common table is a grandchild table that is commonly referenced even if the parent tables are different. As a result, the main The lamp 9a is turned off.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, and executes the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to the one used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the main title part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, the production control CPU 120 refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to a rainbow color over the period of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks in white at the start of the second part of the subtitle constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the main lamp 9a changes to rainbow colors over the period of the second part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, and sets the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and displays a lamp based on the newly received extended command. Switch to lamp control using data table. Thereby, the main lamp 9a continues to be turned off until it receives a new extension command, and upon receiving the new extension command, the main lamp 9a switches to the light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to control the side lamp 9b for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the child table: : When BF01 is received, the lamp control of the side lamp 9b is performed with reference to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, as shown in FIG. 91, the grandchild table and execution time of the side lamp 9b are set in the order of reference.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (FIG. 92) that is initially set in the child table: As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamp with reference to the grandchild table: I do. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white over the period of the company name part constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 9500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, over the period of model introduction 1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, the lighting color of the side lamp 9b changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character appearing. do.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 12500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-1 constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in green over the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-2 constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in green over the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, and performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: As a result, over the period of model introduction 2-3 constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 5000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, and executes the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. Common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table common to the one used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamps 9b emit light in rainbow colors over the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks in white at the start of the subtitle 1 part constituting the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the emitted light color of the side lamp 9b changes to rainbow colors over the period of the first part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes in white at the start of the second part of the subtitle constituting the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamps 9b emit light in rainbow colors over the period of the second part of the subtitle that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration production.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, the common table (grandchild table): Perform lamp control with reference. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it refers to the grandchild table: Take control. As a result, the side lamps 9b are lit in white during the attention-calling 1 and attention-calling 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demonstration performance.

After that, when the production control CPU 120 measures 4000ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it refers to the common table (grandchild table): Take control. As a result, the side lamp 9b is turned off for 500 ms.

The effect control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and displays a lamp based on the newly received extended command. Switch to lamp control using data table. As a result, the side lamp 9b continues to be turned off until it receives a new extension command, and upon receiving the new extension command, the side lamp 9b switches to the light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 98, child tables that also refer to the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo. The grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 is With reference to the table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the luminance data specified by the grandchild table, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are controlled in the same procedure as above.

As a result, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c flash in white for 500 ms after the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance and at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, thereby configuring the customer waiting demonstration performance. It lights up in white for the period of the company name part, and the lighting pattern changes according to the movement of the letters of the company name, and then remains off for 500ms, and appears for the period of model introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance. The lighting color changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white depending on the type of character being played, and the lighting continues to be white for the period of model introduction 2-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. In addition, the lighting mode changes according to a predetermined pattern, flashing in green during the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, and lights up white during the period of model introduction 2-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. , and the lighting mode changes according to a predetermined pattern, flashing in green during the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, and lights up white during the period of model introduction 2-3 that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance. Then, the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, and then the light goes off for 500ms, and the light emission color changes to rainbow colors during the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demonstration performance, forming the customer waiting demonstration performance. It flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part, changes to a rainbow color over the period of the subtitle 1 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance, and flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance. , the emitting color changes to a rainbow color during the period of the subtitle 2 part that makes up the customer waiting demonstration performance, and then turns off for 500 ms, and during the period of the attention calling 1 and attention calling 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demonstration performance, respectively. It lights up in white, then remains off for 500ms, remains off until a new extended command is received, and upon receiving the new extended command, switches to the light emission mode based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control based on the extended command: BF01 based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, thereby controlling the main lamp 9a, the movable lamp 9d, the decorative lamp 9f, and the attacker lamp 9c change in luminous color and luminous manner according to each part of the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Note that the child table and grandchild table for the button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo, so the lamp control based on the lamp data table (button lit white) that was previously set will continue. will be carried out.

In addition, the lamp data table: customer waiting demo includes the company name part, model introduction 1 part, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2- for the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. 2. Model introduction 3-2, Model introduction 2-3, Since a grandchild table is specified for each main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention part, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Lamp control can be performed so that the lamp 9c emits light according to each part.

In addition, in the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, for the main lamp 9a, a grandchild table is specified for each company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and attention calling part. For model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3, which make up the model introduction part, the grandchild table of 1 is specified, so the overall The amount of data can be reduced.

In addition, the lamp data table: customer waiting demo does not have a grandchild table of the button lamp 9e, and lamp control is performed for the button lamp 9e based on the grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo, so the total amount of data is can be reduced.

Furthermore, for the grandchild table that is controlled to be turned off and the grandchild table that is caused to emit light in rainbow colors, lamp control is performed using a common table that is also used in other parent tables, so the overall amount of data can be reduced. A grandchild table that temporarily emits white light may also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lit white]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: button white lighting parent table used when extended command: B001 is received, and FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white lighting child table. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the contents, and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of button white lighting.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after the power is restored, after the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the gaming state, and after the end of the operation promotion performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the extended command. : Specify the parent table for button white lighting based on B001. As shown in FIG. 99, the parent table for button white lighting is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B001, the button lamp 9e is controlled by referring to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table of button white lighting.

In the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 100, the grandchild table and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referred to are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (FIG. 101) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, as shown in FIG. 101, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to the brightness to emit white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, Lamp control is performed based on the lamp data table based on the extended commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table with the white button lit, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Button flashing white]
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: button white blinking parent table used when extended command: B002 is received, and FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: button white blinking child table. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of blinking white button.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B002, which is transmitted during a game to perform control to display an image corresponding to an operation promotion performance that causes the button lamp 9e of the display control unit 123 to blink in white, Command: Specify the parent table of the white blinking button based on B002. As shown in FIG. 102, in the parent table of the button blinking white, it is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B002, the lamp control of the button lamp 9e is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of button white blinking.

As shown in FIG. 103, the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is set with the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (FIG. 104) set in the child table:

In the grandchild table: XD_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, as shown in FIG. 104, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU every execution time of the brightness data. In the brightness data set in the grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table of the white button blinking, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: Button blinking red]
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of lamp data table: Button flashing red, which is used when extended command: B003 is received, and FIG. 106 is the setting of the child table of lamp data table: Button flashing red. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of blinking red button.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command: B003, which is transmitted during a game to perform control to display an image corresponding to an operation promotion performance that causes the button lamp 9e of the display control unit 123 to blink in red, Command: Specify the parent table of the blinking red button based on B003. As shown in FIG. 105, the parent table of the button flashing red is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: :B003, the lamp control of the button lamp 9e is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table of the blinking button.

As shown in FIG. 106, the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is set with the grandchild table of the button lamp 9e to be referenced and the execution time.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (FIG. 107) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP.

As shown in FIG. 107, the brightness data and execution time of the button lamp 9e to be referenced are set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to have a red light emitting brightness and an off state, and the button lamp 9e blinks in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) for changing the lighting mode of the button lamp 9e before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, Performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on commands.

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set in the parent table with the button blinking red, so the child tables and grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c are not set. Lamp control based on the current lamp data table continues.

[Lamp data table: initialization notification]
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: initialization notification parent table used when the extended command: BFFF is received, and FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: initialization notification child table. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: grandchild table of initialization notification.

When the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: BFFF that is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the production control CPU 120 issues an initialization notification based on the extended command: BFFF. Specify the parent table of. As shown in FIG. 108, the initialization notification parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: : When BFFF is received, lamp control of the main lamp 9a is performed with reference to the child table:XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table of the initialization notification.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 109, the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time are set.

The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (FIG. 110) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, as shown in FIG. 110, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA every execution time of the brightness data. In the brightness data set in the grandchild table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the production control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. Furthermore, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extension command before 600000ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. .

As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the initialization notification parent table has child tables that also refer to the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. In addition, grandchild tables to be referred to are set in these child tables, and luminance data to be referred to are set in these grandchild tables in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 Referring to the child table specified in the table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker Controls the lamp 9c and button lamp 9e.

Regarding the brightness data set in the grandchild table that the child table of the initialization notification refers to for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, the brightness that causes red light to be emitted is also set. Also, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are lit in red.

[Lamp data table: error]
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error parent table used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, and FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error child table. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of an error, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the error based on the extended command: BFF1. As shown in FIG. 111, the error parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control that refers to the child table: , the main lamp 9a is controlled by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the parent table of the error.

In the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, as shown in FIG. 112, the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set.

The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a maximum of 600000 ms with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (FIG. 113) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP.

In the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR, as shown in FIG. 113, the luminance data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced are set. Then, the performance control CPU 120 switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR every execution time of the brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchildren table:

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: Repeat control. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600000 ms has passed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command. .

Note that child tables and grandchild tables for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are not set in the parent table of the error, so they must be set before that. Lamp control based on the lamp data table continues.

[Common table]
The common table is a grandchild table that is also referred to by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in FIGS. 114 to 118, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, A common table (XD___L~_OFF) that turns off the attacker lamp 9c and button lamp 9e, and slowly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors. Equipped with a common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01), a common table (XD___L~_RAINBOW_02) that changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e into rainbow colors at high speed, etc. .

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. It is possible to perform lamp control using a table.

By providing a common table that can be referenced from child tables set in different parent tables to perform lamp control in this way, data capacity can be reduced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the embodiment, the first effect mode can be executed in a low base state, the second effect mode can be executed in a low accuracy high base state, and the third effect mode can be executed in a high accuracy high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute two or more types of production modes in a low base state, or it may be possible to execute three or more types of production modes in a high base state, Only one type of production mode may be executable.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a vertical scroll display is performed in the first performance mode, a rotating display is performed in the second performance mode, and a vertical scroll display is performed in the third performance mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the manner of variable display of decorative symbols in each performance mode can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above embodiment, a jackpot gaming state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. , a small winning game state, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state is defined as a low-accuracy low-base state, and the special states in which variable display is more likely to be executed and the average variable display period is shorter than the normal state are defined as a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy low-base state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the normal state may be a low probability state, and the special state may be a high probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low base state), a time saving state (low probability high base state), and a variable probability state (high probability high base state), and when the jackpot game ends, the time saving state or the probability variable state is set. Although the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in a state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to control to a time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, or to be advantageous in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after clearing the RAM (cold start of Pachinko machine 1). The present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled by the state. In this case, for example, the time-saving state that is controlled after a jackpot game is changed to time-saving state A, and the predetermined state is set without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of the advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Time saving state B is a time saving state that is controlled based on the number of times variable display has been executed, and is a part of the case where the variable display result is incorrect in a low probability state, and the variable display result is displayed as a specific result. The time-saving state that is controlled based on what has been done may be called the time-saving state C.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the above-mentioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results for winning the time-saving state C are provided, and the control is performed according to the type of variable display result when winning the time-saving state C. The number of variable display times during which time saving control is performed may be varied.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A game machine that can play games,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The display means is
Displaying a normal state background display in a first period after the game in the normal state ends;
Displaying a special state background display in a first period after the game in the special state ends;
Displaying a demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state;
The light emission control means includes:
In a first period after the game in the normal state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display,
In a first period after the game in the special state ends, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display,
controlling the light emitting means using a demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
controlling the light emitting means using the demonstration display brightness data table in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends;
Before the display means starts control for switching the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is switched from the normal state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table. control,
Before the display means starts control for switching the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light emitting means is switched from the special state background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table. A gaming machine characterized by controlling.

Images